Home

Owners Manual - Dealer e

1. 393 Radio OperallOn 445 4645 ou 999 SR 554495 hes 232 Radio Remote Controls less 230 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 224 Rear Cupholdef uu icu eames pg ROS ACE de dom qn 156 Rear ocal Hol URE siete i3 Sore ages dest a acia 124 Rear Window Defroster lesen 158 Rear Window Features eese 158 Recorder Event Data llle 60 Recreational TOME ager v see veg yu vu ga 336 Reformulated Gasoline Ls 915 isi ei apeere 6a 6 teen m 385 Release Hood 4 245445 5404404662944 PUR S 126 Reminder Digits OU cs ecce atacan doa t va e yon 129 Reminder Seat Belt leen 44 Remote Control Dl EE lend uox ux HERE qb PIE EU HE 26 Remote Keyless Entry RKE x 5 32 RIRs 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 230 Remote Starting System eee id Remote Irunk Release 54 44 3255 44944 ORDE HIK 34 Replacement Bulbs 1293 29 924423405 ences d 414 KR DIGCemen Neyo sore as PE eu e qae E 17 Replacement Paris uuo Ren dm ops s 376 Replacement Ties sapeda ersi emeritis ages 302 Reporting Safety Defects asse ter KERE 448 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 172 Restraint Head eee 121 Restraints Child 44s veste y essere ews 61 Restraints Occupant sure EER eontra pene Ra 36 Rocking Venicle When Stuck vue sopas 4 ben 365 Rotation WINGS ode ew 3x ben PRR EE HO ee e 304 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
2. 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers Jacking and Changing a Tire 3 Set the parking brake WARNING 4 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis Carefullv foll th t ER t sion or REVERSE manual transmission E de Pe SA help prevent personal injury or damage to your 5 Turn OFF the ignition vehicle 6 Block the front and rear of the Always park on a firm level surface as far from a wheel diagonally opposite of the jack the edge of the roadway as possible before raising zz ing position For example if changing the vehicle the right front tire block the left rear Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher T Aw wheel Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to EGU IGS be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle transmission in PARK a manual transmission in when the vehicle is being jacked REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 WARNING Continued 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or infla
3. y Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 75 Safety Defects Reporting 0 448 Salety Exhaust GaS yin ide eos KERKE oe ee S 22 Dately Intormaton lite 25x23 E RERPEAE ES 287 Daley VIDS rr 71 Satellite Radio Antenna ln 225 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 224 Schedule Maintenance leen 426 Seat Belt Maintenance lens 406 Seat Belt Reminder s 44 Seat CHG 2s 4255645044664 EUROS ooh RUE 36 37 73 And Pregnant WOME sis a gares oP ee xs 46 Child Restraint 0 0 61 62 63 68 ED els we caved oe eee aoe eee ee bees eee 46 Front Seat sax euer 26 o eo Ps ee 37 38 INSPCCHOM si sies wo PO Sat upra eV amas di 73 Operating Instructions cs acre seat ae ane 38 Pretensioners 0 00 cee eee eee eee 44 Kear Seat oue AE Gate o a be EER OS EE oe EE 97 Reminder eee 169 Untwisting Procedure 00 42 Beale 645 ECT ETTETSTTTT TTL TC AE E 118 diie 233 93 919 oo DE HE RE BOR He 118 Head Restraints leeren 121 a EEEELLIIIIILGGIIIIULIILUIIILIUILILILLCEELULUILLITLUOA GUDGGUULG qeaGcd90AUu0U IUc qi CAAAbLILALIULAALALUIPLU GaaoP7a cdiuu n n KLn4 LLUAGIGXUu4 1LAAOL DOO C LO IOp wWLLaOUL L 2 2 004217 latc TT 122 Leigh Ad USE ss RAAR S Rd e dal 118 us bet SUD DOE sce pasatge eee DER 121 POWER 2 2 99 dux dox endnote de be hee ees 118 Kear FOIT 25444625 a ed A cpi S
4. If Equipped Tie ERAS EO EE T PES ERESS 127 O Voice Command System Operation 113 o Headlights And Parking Lights 127 EPCOMMMANGS ius euoo aem ierre RR on x 115 o Automatic Headlights If Equipped 128 Bi Voice TANNE sade 3972 209 oe ag Sun yen dos 118 o Headlights On With Wipers Available With EET OE EE RT N 118 Automatic Headlights Only 128 O Power Seats 52s use e Ea RU eee ees ES 118 H Headlight Time Delay 128 o Manual Front Seatback Recline 120 5 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 129 O Lumbar Support sse sees 121 O Lights On Reminder 3 sins wr Sore d epar 45 129 O Head Restraints esses sss 121 D Fog Lights If Equipped 129 ER ES 122 O Multifunction Lever sess 130 O Easy Entry Seats sss sees 124 ELDUPRCOIETIOEE ore eae os d dee eee s 130 3 Folding Rear Seat sisse essen 124 O Lane Change 5918 oss e 3 05 heen teks N 131 o High Low Beam Switch 131 ll To Open And Close The Hood 126 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 ao dek MEE ERU PRECOR CER 131 ELIO Ped iva 30 9 Io 4 999 EVPRIGORES S RS 138 D Overhead Console Map Reading Lights 132 ELIO este beet esa eem acra db eee gn ty 139 klier ord is lis ane op Rd ani RR e 133 o To Vary The Speed Setting cemere 199 W Windshield Wipers And Washers 134 o To Accelerate For Passing O Intermitte
5. Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn STARTING AND OPERATING 333 057003766 334 STARTING AND OPERATING O CN O O O o Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range use the AutoStick mode to select a lower gear range NOTE Using a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising s
6. To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command vr button and say Help or Main Menu N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command EVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vn button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FE
7. If Equipped O Traction Control System TCS If Equipped D Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped O Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Transmission Only O Electronic Stability Program ESP If Equipped ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 ELO BEDTODIZINO ESI x dssuccu ke RE phe ws Sa 285 O ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And EP TCS Indicator Light sss 454 3 ees 286 Mi Tire Safety Information 287 D Tire Markings O Tire Terminology And Definitions O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 292 Mi Tires General Information 296 O Tire Pressure iex 3 do EE A TR Byes 296 D Tire Inflation Pressures 297 Radial Fly lites kerer neriie wane HARE 299 O Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 299 EL Tite SDA ura care eo lt sce seeds dee es 300 O Tread Wear Indicators 301 POOP TE MMC 302 E Replacement Tires iss eoe RR Red 302 W Snow Tires e ee 304 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 304 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 305 O Base System O Premium System If Equipped 310 O General Information xs os xw vena sd ee 314 Bl Fuel Requirements 4 314 O 3 5L And 5 7L Engine With Automatic Transmission 0 00 cee eee ee eee 314 0 5 7L Engine With Manual Transmission 315 244 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id O Reformulated Gasoline
8. een 141 Contract Service aussy ces t u a 447 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 999 COONSS ste 224449 00a Pot WESE RD RE s ped 390 Adding Coolant Antifreeze sys coda t mes 297 Coolant Capacity asuewoctes HAD KAREE ees 421 Coolant Level leeren 390 394 Disposal of Used Coolant 394 Drain Flush and Refill 391 IDs DBCHON se 2 309 9 3 VERA ER EER HELDER 394 Points to Remember sss 394 liesstue C aD siese s eq DR SE SISSE 393 Radiator Cap seep SERE M 393 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 391 421 422 Corrosion Protection eee eee 401 Cruise Control Speed Control 137 Crise LISDE audios e md RR bU OR eee ews 165 CCUDRO IGIS x cute d docu AL RIA He Ere ge EE 155 406 Customer Assistance leen 445 Data Recorder Event llle 60 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 133 Daytime Running Lights as aco eee noa 129 Dealer Service seach eu ous a 6 ewe oe a ON 377 Deck Lid Emergency Release i 35 Deck Lid Power Release 34 Defroster Rear Window 158 Defroster Windshield 73 234 Delay Intermittent Wipers 134 Diagnostic System Onboard xs ok t dass 374 Dimmer Switch Headlight ses ie re rs dol 458 INDEX M Dipsticks Oil Engine Power Steering Disabled Vehicle Towing Disposal Anti
9. for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Traction Control System TCS If Equipped This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential LSD and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers
10. Headlights On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 To activate the delay feature place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights or parking lights on or place the ignition in the RUN position again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature The Headlight delay time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Prog
11. If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS twice IF EQUIPPED Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number wi
12. LIOPPIUIS sae as e auae Mee ERE en Gare ad 375 B Replacement Parts 004 376 W Dealer Service 000005 377 B Maintenance Procedures sss 377 SERPS OI Lou daas qoae ate WOO qe Pu dri i N 378 EES ING OUE GE sa cies oxy ech hes JR RR DI 381 O Engine Adr leaner HEF scs iore da oe as 382 O Maintenance Free Battery i26 nike hh 382 D Air Conditioner Maintenance O Body UDECOBOIE 25 SEER EIER KG O Windshield Wiper Blades 386 DO Adding Washer Fluid sist s ou des 386 3 0 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ELBXhaust Syste 542404646245 OE ARE 387 W Replacement Bulbs 414 EI CONES Syste eH shee pone BERE bo PA get 390 W Bulb Replacement uu gas dud ALS eu eee AE 415 ELDrake System x ou ae san ED enna ee ears 395 O Low Beam Headlamp High Beam o Clutch Hydraulic System Manual rend lamp Mr dm ei Ana A15 Transmission If Equipped 398 5 i p TUPPES n n n n E O Low Beam Headlamp High Beam o Manual Transmission If Equipped 398 Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp Models D Automatic Transmission If Equipped 399 With High Intensity Discharge HID Eie 2006 ced ot bo Ae e HERE ie oe Hi 401 pianta EA eae eas id a Appearance Care And Proiecion Brom O Front Rear Side Marker Lamp 416 OPE SIEI exis Goa ARE Spur ay da E SOR 401 H Tal Tura And Stop Lamp x ans 417 dor Tm 407 D Center Tail Backup Lamp 419 O Integrated Power Modu
13. LODGE 2210 Challenger OWNER S MANUAL o m O c REEDE e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION sit ees Be n ER WK RE eae ea ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Information Provided by DEEFNLER CONTENTS B introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner wi
14. Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illumi nate To turn the ESP ON again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn off ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Bie666a2 ESP OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESP ON again by momen tarily pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator If the power supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged the ESP BAS Malfunction Indi cator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel complete
15. Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 290 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER EXAMPLE
16. This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract If this occurs remove the obstruction and press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button in the center of the switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adju
17. WARNING In an collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the
18. WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed Removing Slack From Belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a f
19. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if desired Also correct for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped with all season tires is the forward cross as shown in the following diagram EDS EE EE ad 81f0565d Tire Rotation STARTING AND OPERATING 305 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperat
20. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the system will release brake pressure in proportion to traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in BAS cannot prevent accidents including those re the intended direction of travel sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that 5 could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of e Vehicle must be stopped
21. Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Vanity Mirrors A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Illuminated Vanity Mirrors Slide On Rod and Extender Features of Sun An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use Visor the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the To use the Slide On Rod feature of the sun visor rotate mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is Close the mirror cover to turn off the light parallel to the side window grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position To use the extender feature of the sun visor grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward ee v B1830d84 Illuminated Vanity Mirror 030405960 Slide On Rod Extender Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the syste
22. a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CHAngE OIL Base Cluster Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you place the ignition switch in the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Place the ignition switch in the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps 20 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid leve
23. campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group 450 LLC vehicles A complete working knowle
24. distance to account for this lack of the feature or you could be in an accident and be seriously injured You should take your vehicle to an authorized dealer 14 Oil Pressure Warning Light wy This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 15 High Beam Indicator This indicator will turn on when the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first placed in ON RUN A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu ously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee 17 Shift Lever Indica
25. e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings a The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation
26. is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 To Manually Set the Clock RER 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed Io move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock se
27. manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Flu ids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Manual Transmission If Equipped Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left side of the transmission The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or damage to the transmission Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Transmission Fluid If contaminated with water change the fluid immedi ately See your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Automatic Transmission If Equipped CAUTION Continued Fluid Level Check e The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does required For this reason the dipstick is omitted conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level damage to the transmission may occur Your
28. tail lamp assembly ar n 3 Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp assembly 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to 7 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side access the bulbs 8 Disconnect the electrical connector 9 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly 10 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 11 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 12 Reinstall the tail lamp assembly fasteners electrical Center Tail Backup Lamp connector and trunk liner See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement 13 Reinstall tail lamp retainer Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly see your authorized dealer 14 Close the trunk 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Re License Lamp 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws N MAINTAINING YOUR V
29. with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK Left Right Door Ajar e Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Oil Change Required Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Channel Transmit Channel Training Channel Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Did Not Train Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Check TPM System with a single chime ESP Off Electronic Stability Program is deactivated ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped Check Gascap Key Fob Battery Low Service Keyless System Wrong Key Push Button or Insert Key Turn To Run refer to Remote Starting System in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle 1 4 SKIPSHIFT Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display
30. 00 TROIR Pas TO ordi ME riene DERDES HERE 251 Hooded Dianne 223 05 ad Es orb ded E eiia 251 Fuel Reguirements iss hasie MEE HR EE 314 ED DLE feeadecucecetaen Gee a5 d ees 361 EE ES EE DES FEE ee 378 421 422 OM Chance Interval vios e cpu P ED MR 172 379 OU Piller Cap s saare oe OUER eee hae sees ee 380 M S A oes ao ss Ee AR OP HE OMRI es 381 Oil Filter Disposal 20g SERP ERAS OR 381 Oil Selection SS 00000005 379 421 OU SyMIMCNe Ss tee ex CR bed POR Eod RR ee 381 OVPU Ua coke PESE SR oes Pee GOES 339 DIG EDDIE 2259 9 3 SERS oes oe DE ee he 245 Temperate Gauge seen ae AAR BREED 166 Engine Oil VISSOSID 22 5 econ Sheu Gee ees PSY 380 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 57 Entry System Ill uminated 4 3 05 d 504 ones S 20 FINANO Pr AE AA AR Re 315 Event Data Recorder asse daa E RE MR ER de 60 Exhaust Gas Caution SS SS 72 318 Enau T OV leld sasie sar Pod ee eae ne os ot 72 387 Extenor Folding MitrOrS s2 axs x RR 82 E detiot BISOUS ses os ras nod deg yu a ER Ex 127 EXIGUOD kielie 24 3 eei REK PUn a dore d RACE EROR as 75 Filler Locatiom Puel 2222 od Rs 319 Filters Aar Cleaner seep dusk wu OO BEET SE 382 Eie ie Od Tm 381 422 Engine OU Disposal sei Ver R EER HER RR 381 Flashers Hazard WANE soon GERS ER BS KER Se ti 939 Turn Signal ee Ra NNNM NN Flash To Pass 4 225522 299 2 9 9 wx 131 Hab Due Change oo 92 9 290919 9 9 as beatae d Bol Flooded Engine Starting 2 soe Sid REG RS 251 Fluid AA E
31. 250 ES ie Fails tOo Glar 4 4 9415 van one de ea 291 IS oikos RED AR DOE ER ER e 26 Starting and Operating iii wen PRES eer HD ves 245 Starine Procedures ike pistri He BEE KOR 245 Steering Coli CODO xs cas ee nere eere NEE 130 Colum Och seepi e cs ged eee ees Tes 136 DOWOE qom 24 64 RE EE SETHE ERR 271 272 TOC COMING oa oe dcos Stee oa Dr eds 136 Wheel EE s ies SEE ES oe bk ORE MIS ON 136 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 230 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Oyster CONUS P 230 Xu P T 414 Storage VENICE sesse dad g PERS 238 414 ONNO voue Velde us RARR oak oboe os A14 xcd cc rr 365 DIR ODE Pri eed esse ODE AR REPRE PL 149 te lasses DIGIAEE aca usa dtp ge ED od Rees S ed 141 Sunroof Maintenance aas etse eke ees 152 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 47 SWay Control Trailer gad eee wad OD be MEDE 325 ate Engine ON ora ds dr dee EREI 381 System Remote Starling 2 us a6 oo Heo oe DERE 26 Te DOMET pei wma eie wee d vdd wr ee es 165 Telescoping Steering Column 136 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 166 340 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 65 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Theft System Security Alarm 18 Tit Steel ure COMM MM ME 136 Time Delay Heide 276s VOERE RE REK sans 128 Tire and Loading Information Placard 292 Tire Identification Number TIN 290 Tite Manes a s6 EE 2 50540604 R
32. Commands Voice Commands Primar Primar language return to main menu select phone send N set up phone settings or phone list names list phones mobile mute off towing assistance new entr transfer call Uconnect Tutorial try again OO n pager pair a phone voice training ohone pairing pairing work ohonebook ohone book yes previous record again o redial N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and pho
33. Driving style e Shift lever position e Accelerator position e Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position OFF position with Keyless Go before restarting Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position OFF position with Keyless Go first The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 259 WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles running Before exiting a vehicle you should always The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK shift the transmission into PARK remove the key fob position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the bra
34. E D U L E S 8 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake Required Maintenance Intervals master cylinder and power steering and add as Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following needed pages for the required maintenance intervals e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equi
35. Engine uw xp wordt Fa ps 167 239 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 449 Pant Care P C 401 Pac dIE ere AO OR Sesser eee eee EE 24 Parking Drake asse aci eden WER Soo HER WES 273 Passio E e os oar 2 eae WE Oe RR 191 Personal OCUS eo REEDE READ ED 189 POS 70 Phone Cellular ii 3 EES ER ROSE E bu ri 85 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 85 Placard Tire and Loading Information 222 Power ta 0356500505554 DE de OE EE RO ou 276 Deck Lid Release is iss ur BAR RARR ARE as 34 a EEEEELLLLLIIIIIILIGIIIIULIIIUIIIILLIIILELCLLLULIILLA LAOO IJI LLILL LLLU LtILBNLIH LLUIILAbReo IZTGIHLA INDEX 467 Distribution Center Fuses 409 Door LOCKS c cuoi te URS A BEES Pe TE PR 30 MS So usos s 6h Pee en ee NUS RUE RS 83 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 152 o ee ce ee ee eee ee ee ER ae 118 PICCHNG n aras ario S S OES oe oe uS M IC oe 271 272 DUFIEODI ant 94849 MEER See EE PES s DOS 149 luce lt n cteee aac thane ei ke a oR De 32 Power ieeting PUU se onsekere Hie wi 423 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 46 PreparaBon lot Jacking sine vere vago Pes po Pretensioners Pea DEUS zoe dou s ow sa 279 AE DERE eye oan d Programmable Electronic Features 189 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry iz ark xr pr ea eed 20 Radial PD INES es tease RES UE YT geskiet 299 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap
36. If the MIL is Kd m f This light will turn on to indicate that the flashing severe catalytic converter damage and deckl Mp CC decklid may be ajar power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required ru 28 Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator WARNING SO This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system conveniently allows the driver to select a EVIC variety of useful information by pressing the switches The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the tures a driver interactive display which is located in the following instrument cluster ar N e Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass Display e Outside Temperature Display e Trip Computer Functions e Uconnect Phone If Equipped 041005513 TM Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Uconnect gps Screens If Equipped e Audio Mode D
37. LIS Ub osse d e tore DER EER 55 60 73 168 Airbag NIOIBIODADGO 5a ESRA fhe ER en dos 99 AIDIL dE Er ERA ERG Hee 53 56 Airbag Window Side Curtain 50 53 56 Alam LENE w 44 omsg sad boo 099 3 9 9 Pure OK 174 Alarm PELLE eesis anecdote Bo eee ee SX 24 Alarm bedui Alarm eius x ar erpai ot RR 18 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 2452233 2064405 2 2 225 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 391 421 etes i Gen coe vage eid VES been MP E 394 Anti Lock Brake System ABS ie 276 279 Anti Lock Warne Light 22e ew cod 176 278 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 voe iese ii suos sed x vow ers as E BR d i 401 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Petisie MOWING aci esu 23 ud ieg draco d wea AE dd 100 Auto Down Power Windows 33 Auto Unlock Doors eee 31 Automatic Dimming Mirror 1395 99 Es s i 81 Automatic Door Locks sess 30 31 N INDEX 455 AgtomsucTieadhe ie sot AARSEL ED 128 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 172 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives 24 44 eibi dme isrado 400 Automatic Transmission 262 399 400 Adding TING ss eque 886 BEREA edo 400 423 Ding d PT 266 Fluid and Filter Changes ss ska cbe serais 400 RUC EDE Secedcucyeeatege iU ePi es 400 Prad Level Check uuo ie mice er rt podes 399 FAC WC aud TETE TETTETETT
38. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx CAUTION Continued Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula e This vehicle has not been designed for use with HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or propylene glycol based engine coolant anti equivalent freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to Adding Coolant exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine anticipated coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifr
39. Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of 2 Press and hold the HOME button for approximately the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 11 LAN 4o NM 6 wd 78V 9N Compass Variance Map 5 040506040 1 Turn the ignition switch ON two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the HOME button to exit System Warnings Customer Information Features Press and release the MENU button until SYSTEM WARNINGS displays in the EVIC Then press the SCROLL button to display anyone of the following choices e Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for ea
40. PANEL 213 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holdi
41. Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Clutch Hydraulic System Manual Transmission If Equipped The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leakage or wear use only the
42. Start the engine 5 6 Rotate the steering wheel one half turn to the left 7 Press the ESP OFF switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls four times within 20 seconds The ESP TCS Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator Light will blink sev eral times to confirm HSA is disabled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it s previous setting Electronic Stability Program ESP If Equipped This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path STARTING AND OPERATING 283 does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the
43. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not functi
44. UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information e When not using the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further
45. Use only manufacturer s recommended Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined power steering fluid service interval is not required The fluid should only be ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK or REVERSE manual transmission only position When the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is in the ON position RUN position with Keyless Go the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK o
46. a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone
47. adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the rad
48. and Operation The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk ol IS q N er 060410595 Sealant Bottle TIREFIT Location Deflation Button If Equipped Pressure Gauge WO N Hmm Power Button 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5 Mode Select Knob Selecting Sealant Mode l Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to this ee Fose C leat quin Yelow Cap position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant 7 Air Pump Hose Black why and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant op dham Hose clear hose with the yellow cap 6 when selecting this mode 8 Power Plug Using the Mode Select Knob and Hoses Your TIREFIT kit may be eguipped with either of the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Using the Power Button Selecting Air Mode l Push and release the Power Button 4 once to Tum he Mode det Kaob Orok C turn ON the TIREFIT kit Push and release the is l l Power Button 4 again to turn OFF the TIRE position for air pump operation only FIT kit Use the Black Air Pump Hose 7 j fh Al when selecting this mode Using the Deflation Button If Equipped Press the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air T pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 TIREFIT Usage Precautions e You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle e Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Ne eie evan a von oe ger Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed on the y 5 P bottle l
49. and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between
50. any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 CUPHOLDERS Illuminated Front Cupholders If Equipped The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs They are turned on with the headlights or parking lights Refer to Lights in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console Front Cupholders 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Cupholders CONSOLE FEATURES The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned for ward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows Sliding Center Console Armrest The center console armrest slides forward with three detents to provide flexibility for comfort cupholder use and shifting ease pes b 81f30ae4 Rear Cupholders Sliding Console Armrest NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Console Storage The center console has a storage compartment located underneath the armrest and also contains a 12 Volt power outlet a molded in coin holder designed to hold various size coins The center console may als
51. arm is dangerous not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snug Continued Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too will withdraw any slack in the belt tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug UY ap zs mue Io belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an Mera ie dias accident vu Pob
52. at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Bulb Number Discharge AID oe n n he od deese MAR a DIS Serviced at Authorized Dealer High Beam Headlamp is rk ws e aie REED eas 9005 Front Park Turn Lamps eaa de 3157A Pront Fog POTE soog heed cse deo Pvt 9145 H10 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Front Side Marker o pd dre bea rhe debe Pedes 168 TOI AGO ape ett es ete GRE a ee ran 3057K daily Stop Tuin Lamp cemere 6 ewe odd oes 3057K Real Side MatKOr sie ase Ss oh epee epa 168 Backup Lamp ad e Ee EED sr Rem Yes dd 921 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Ee o ereere raen Rra a 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp Models with Halogen Headlamps If Equipped See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp and Park Turn Lamp Models with High Intensity Discharge HID Headlamps If Equipped HID Headlamps The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not at
53. bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an accident e Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GT
54. be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use th
55. blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to
56. button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate TUNE SCROLL 042305233 Media Center 130 RES RSC Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 SEEK Buttons Press and rele
57. can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNINCG Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any com mercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abra sive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the
58. containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ee VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Yo
59. drive with all side windows fully open Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle 056807146 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle Use a finger to pull open the door If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Cap Base Model 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Fuel Filler Cap R T Model NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler door ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas
60. during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Go The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position RUN position for Keyless Go You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small am
61. e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the GVR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then
62. filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Change the ma
63. for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel ec
64. for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the handheld transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the
65. garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radi
66. in use 030907290 p NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNINCG e Becertain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint When the seatback is folded to the upright position make system sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap Rear Folding Seat 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the 1 Pole te lessies er es ie dee dei sie OO ee of the instrument panel 81e81ef1 Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 CAUTION LIGHTS Headlights and Parking Lights d possible ee n not slam the hood to The headlight switch is located on the left side of the c un it d the ae ai 5s is hip ud instrument panel This switch contr
67. is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting 8 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to WARNING exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature
68. label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicat
69. level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it toa NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to service center where it can be raised on a lift access the jack Continued The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire 2 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 1 Open the trunk 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire DART ERUNT EERS 812c5587 Spare Tire Fastener Opening The Access Panel N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353 4 Remove the spare tire WARNING Remove the fastener securing the jack es A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or KaTa Rr MC hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack Jack Fastener or changing the wheel
70. module contains fuses and relays e When installing the integrated power module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Integrated Power Module 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse NES T id Amp Washer Motor oe m SERE Wiper nei Module PCM 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Pink 25 Amp Ignition Run Start ABS Valves Natural 40 Amp Radiator Fan Lo High EET 25 Amp EGR Solenoid Green Natural Alternator 50 Amp Anti Lock Brake System NS NEN RN Red ABS Pump Motor rr 25 Amp Ignition Coils Injectors rr Natural Radiator Fan 7 25 Amp Headlamp Washer Relay Natural If Equipped 30 Amp Starter Green MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 vi Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays Access Panel 410 MAINTAI
71. not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant into the deflated tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shifter in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn OFF the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the sealant mode position and not air mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn ON the TIREFIT kit N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if avail able Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on air mode and pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Seal
72. notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the CAUTION exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Sa
73. of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 310 STARTING AND OPERATING Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors t
74. or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable Battery Location clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Continued 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air cond
75. paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Setup Uconnect Tutorial Read Send Messages Messages 030607515 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Voice Tree Phonebook Phensbosik Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed SHE Enter Name 1st Confirmation I at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New New Entry Added Nurber Entry is modified Phonebook Cleared Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Announcement Contirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming va ra Device towing Message Eum Assistance _ Language Toggle Confirmation New phone Select a language well English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais amol override phone priorities Select phone to be deleted List Phones System Lists Phones Mote Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 oice Commands Primar Alternate s X three O tw fj eight nine star e O C G continue delete dial download edit home p 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice
76. phonebook entry in the current e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say language is deleted Phonebook Delete e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will deleted or edited then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Press the We button to begin Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EVR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you Delete wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of th
77. radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 FUSES CAUTION Integrated Power Module IPM The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the engine compartment This
78. radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name
79. seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is placed in ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021307469 Key Fob with RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 within five seconds to unlock both doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First LES This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or both doors on the first press of the
80. snow covered or slippery OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and sunglass storage Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink button and a power sunroof switch may also be included if equipped Overhead Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the overhead console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels HomeLink Butt
81. start playing songs in playlists etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCT SCROLL Button When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp A Audio screen press the SCROLL button to seek v up and down radio stations tracks chapters files etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This conditio
82. than one gear while downshifting CAUTION could cause you to lose control of your vehicle You Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if could have an accident the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal If you skip more than one gear while downshift ing or downshift at too high an engine speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph 24 km h as you could damage the engine and or clutch 258 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears au tomatically dependent upon e Altitude e Vehicle loading e
83. the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go feature the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go feature the message Insert Key Turn To On will display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob Once inserted the message Turn To On will display in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON RUN e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go fea ture the message Push Button Insert Key will dis play in the EVIC until you push the START button NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not Manual Door Locks inside the vehicle before closing the door To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door WARNING lock knob on each door trim panel upward e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a veh
84. the PARK position 3 Turn the engine off 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever into the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears 266 STARTING AND OPERATING M AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick 3 5L Engine AutoStick allows you to move the shift lever to the left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position this allows the selection of the desired top gear For example if you shift the transmission into third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to second or first gear automatically when needed Operation Switching from AutoStick to DRIVE can be done at any vehicle speed To shift from DRIVE mode to AutoStick mode move the shift lever to the left once The current gear will be maintained as the top gear To disable AutoStick simply press and hold the shift lever to the right until D is displayed in the instrument cluster odometer WARNI
85. the head restraint Lumbar Support 81e9897e 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Heated Seats The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and Heated Seat Switch seatback The controls for each heater are located near the After placing the ignition in the ON position you can bottom center of the instrument panel choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu ous operation At that time the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns
86. the level desired or until they lower completely To Open The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to open the trunk Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw
87. the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s if equipped with belt alert seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s or front passenger s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s or passen ger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h For front passenger seats equipped with BeltAlert your vehicle is equipped to detect when it is occupied The BeltAlert warning system is not activated when the NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 front passenger seat is unoccupied The BeltAlert warn ing system may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is prop
88. the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park ing NOTE Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the theft alarm armed will result in the alarm sounding Insert the Key Fob even if the Key Fob battery is dead into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207467 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob With the Keyless Enter N Go system the EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE The power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered power out lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Ce
89. this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG Specificati
90. tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value NS 1A TING AND OPERATING 307 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and or condition warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipp
91. users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely deli
92. vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt c
93. with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock BTSI system that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position OFF position with Keyless Go and the en gine is not running To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to any other ignition position ACC ON RUN position and the brake pedal must be pressed whether or not the engine is running Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To access the override using a flat bladed screwdriver carefully remove the override cover which is located to the right of the shift lever 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position RUN position with Keyless Go without starting the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 261 4 Using the screwdriver press and hold the override tab 5 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position through the access pon on the center console 6 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 7 Reinstall the override cover With Keyless Go If Equipped If the engine is running press the START STOP button to turn it off Release the brake pedal and press the START STOP button once or twice to go to t
94. 0 24 in 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Keep TIREFIT away from open flame or heat source Continued or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing Continued N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 WARNING Continued 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground e TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the allergic reaction or rash consult a physician im valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground mediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children Th
95. 00 miles 805 km N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required M A N T E N A N C E S C H
96. 15 Keyless Enter N GO 42293 Ee iek ems ver 185 Keyless Entry ele su 5 550 E SO ES Y aA 20 kel std C 12 185 247 a EEEEELLLLLLIISIILIIILLLIIIIUIIIIIIILIILLLESNLELLIIILC LILLLLICL AAUUILILLUOUALUL INDEX 163 MEE OT ET EE EE EL ES Wz Kicker Sound Slet 2453542440504 pki hei 228 Knee BOI iss HAT eee eRe RE OE HR 47 Lane Change and Turn Signals 130 Lap Shoulder Belts vis oo RE khoe sos hne Res D LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren suns 65 66 ud oa eae ene ee eee bees EE N seus 75 Els oe ARE OAR AE ER FO a we N 126 Lead Free Gasoline EE EE SS SS eee 314 Leaks Fluid uu N ON OE ER OR NE AE EN N 79 Life of Tires TTC 302 Light DUDS si as AL eterin nra PR RC 75 414 lh eenei taoa aen ap e E a 75 127 AUD TP crm 55 60 73 168 XE MEEREERERETERLITSOOTSETOILTITOTTOTT 174 AU Pel uua e ET RE SA REY SY ERS 176 278 Automate Head lio MiS 2 244583 3 BREER ep 128 Brake Assist Warning sis cosh S39 RS ERES 286 Brake Warning asse gobdepECRA E Ep Ea SUR DE 172 276 Bulb Replacement au nas doa PE dares 414 415 Center Mounted Stop es eem mtn 419 Courtesy Reading lt sss reada vacent ER RES 132 141 Sic Ci ARE EE a E 165 Daytime RUNNING 208 ERA os ace d HEDE 129 Dimmer Switch Headlight 130 131 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 286 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 166 Engine Temperature Warning 168 usn PP 76 POS A EER EE OE IG 129 170
97. 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 314 STARTING AND OPERATING General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 5L and 5 7L Engine with Automatic Transmission The 3 5L and 5 7L engine with automatic transmission is designed to meet all emis 89 sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us 800dfab ino high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RMy METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such NS TA TING AND OPERATING 315 as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these sym
98. 24 Hour Iowing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can
99. 8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au dible and visible signals the horn will pulse the head lights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if both doors and the trunk are closed the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 sec onds During that time the Vehicle Security Light will flash If it does not illum
100. 915 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 315 H E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 316 o MMT In Gasoline uus used dE REY ES 317 o Materials Added To Fuel issu 317 E Fuel System Cautions oe ERR 317 O Carbon Monoxide Warnings 318 EM Adding Fuel iss ss ee OORDEEL DEE REESE 319 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap o sank as RR ed 919 3 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 321 B Vehicle Loading eessse 922 O Vehicle Certification Label suus vce oe dares 322 O Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 322 O Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 922 POV EMOACING PI Dm 229 Odd Gate at PR EE Ree a 225 N Trailer Towing eese 324 O0 Common Towing Definitions 324 O Trailer Hitch Classification 326 O Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Vel ERA sadri mesa 9 P OES od Dt 328 H Trailer And Tongue Weight 328 O Towing Negulremehls xd a isis pene os 329 EE OWA 1906 ue ae oP ans doa et RI dd 334 N Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 6 336 NS TA TING AND OPERATING 245 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others coul
101. ANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se You m
102. ANEL CONTENTS la Instrument Panel Features B instrument Cluster Base B instrument Cluster Premium H Instrument Cluster Descriptions N Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays Rese ees O Engine Oil Change Indicator System D Trip Functions 178 O Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped D Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS I EOUIDDSd sons ed ES vid Eur ki 186 HE oupas Display 40 mana ve EU tone RE 186 H System Warnings Customer Information Features 2 2644 6e456 ebb ome ete a eee rss 188 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features x Lu qud oka oun ESPERE REESE 189 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M lll Media Center 730N 430 RER RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD NAV f Eguipp d is sein EES RS Eur O Operating Instructions Voice Command System VR If Equipped D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone It Equipped iss 3 5 0 RS 484855 O Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio O Clock Setting Procedure RER Radio ll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MPS Audio Play sue akon air tote O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Playe
103. ARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Load ing Information placard 2 GTW 3 GAWR Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 WARNING Continued Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 4 Tongue w
104. ATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel 1 ds ea d ae dH e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel l Radio M t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu s 44 p e h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Radio Menu t itch to the radi A Mc ne el OE G OE To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Memo Previous to play the previous memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In l l Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands e New
105. BO 2246666062 e 2 8465 64688585454 304 Traction Control 422 4464244428046 dos Oe Id dille TOME au aes eh EDAS tees RE AUS ee RS 324 Cooling System IIPS ss sere 403 HR ES 335 ish PET CT 326 Marium Requirements sein aca Rt 920 jo o eee Sag oe ae ae de wee eee ea eae a gas 334 Trailer and Tongue Weight 328 yc PD cT 333 Trailer Towing Guide 622202 EO RO rera ititi 328 Hier NODE Hesse hoes SERS eae 328 Transfer Case lg pr 423 Ti AS SION ae e aci ud ddl sok a ok ees 399 Automatic eee 257 202 399 dun is mae oe ee ees peepee ER Ss 423 Mangal erered EE bag eee oR PET SE 253 PONS P rC Ee 297 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Bitty 2245 462 4542 055 ES 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 142 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry susse dade ee 0044 iens 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transportne d Clo uae aacR Xon 9 SEK ie DA hong eee 70 Tread Wear Indicators 0004 301 Wp Odometer ss ooi ur ek Roo ERR bees 165 170 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 5 3234 wn x BAR Ri 34 35 Trunk Release Emergency seda dmn eed Ee 35 Trunk Release Remote Control 34 diuisio P 130 167 UCI Connector 32 94 044 64 sures oo 4 ES S SAU 218 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 85 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ise 451 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 218 Universal Transmitter 004 142 Unl
106. CIRCULA TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the outside air position e n order to prevent fogging when the RECIRCULA TION button is pressed and the mode control is set to PANEL the A C will engage automatically 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature Air Conditioning Operation Push on this button to engage the Air Conditioning A C A light will illu minate when the A C System is en gaged T 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds Max A C For maximum cooling use the A C and RECIRCULA TION mode buttons at the same time Remote Start If Equipped During remote start operation the climate control soft ware may override the climate control settings depend ing on the outside ambient temperature The table below explains the different scenarios that could occur during remote start operation Once the driver enters the vehicle the control will return to the customer selected settings This feature was de signed to ensure maximum comfort during extreme conditions To en
107. CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassembl
108. DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for high MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation p
109. E N EE UR S os 423 Ehud CapacilleS s veu Aids 8 es abitur uS AE 421 el ELE a au 244 anke eitir ek tirei 75 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 399 Brike osse Ee eeeee DAE RD eas 396 Side Ee 24 G5 AAR EE Og 390 Eise OU cusa p aureo spe DEP PD DAE PD 378 POW CG SIENS Sacha eee y ia PAIRE RR HAD Sk 272 Fluids 262222299 x OSG oS Re Ow ERE DES 422 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 422 Fop LIGII CT 129 170 Folding Kear Seal aui aer vad GRA EERS DR 124 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle sa ke EXPRESSES 365 Duel 23599929299 AT eee eee eee 2 25 314 non P 319 dd MES n ERAS YE RA OR oa eee ER 917 Sm T PF m 315 Soci iP rm 182 Ind PP 315 Filler Cap Gas Cap e 6 25 IE EET FOK Big erro rrr 314 fo P rc TEE OT OR 165 Materials Added 2 655 484 edes ohne AE ER 317 aeara e E EE EO E E 315 Deane Bab ace wwaces HERDER he ed S 314 422 ISSQUI ens sis 25 4 sues oa Pace rope Shes 314 Daven Mode xi a ov cay enira BERE RE DAE 6 182 SPeCCHICaNIONS siese ac a erae UR ones RA ER Di 422 Tonk Capaciiy xa sx gus geo Speed 1 PES 421 Fuel OPEREER aos acu iss drea eR P HR aan EE 182 Pic EVER 42447456458 GOUE AR d RE PEE i 182 Fuel System Caution ies x PECES he RR a 320 LHE NS eie EE RE ER eee en oes ee AES 319 FUSES ek SMAL RAP LOS eee Rees EE ERE 407 D EEEEERIIIISIIIGIIIIIIIULLLLIIULILLHLIIIUSI GE HIaIGLL AAGUBTA OGUO IH OLIULUALGPIo UUU L H7TAG 4AADLUUu INDEX 461 Garag
110. EFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium 58 THINGS
111. EHICLE 421 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 5 7 Liter Engine 72 Liters 3 5 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified 5 7 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 5 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 11 1 Quarts 10 5 Liters Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 14 7 Quarts 13 9 Liters Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 5L Engine Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 5L Engine ZFR5LP 13G Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 5L and 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended Automatic Transmission Fuel Selection 5 7L Eng
112. Engine Block Heater If Equipped 202 GO Manual Transmission If Equipped 245 W Manual Transmission If Equipped D Automatic Transmission If Equipped 246 O Six 5peed Manual Transmission O Keyless Go If Equipped 247 W Automatic Transmission If Equipped 257 O Normal DANNE saa euet gros tiiis 248 HGeneral NOrmation iek EER ewes RR RE 258 H Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or H Key Ignition Park Interlock 260 c P 250 O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 260 Et Engine Fails To Start 212 222 en 251 ME TER is liet OUE aa 09 92 ux x dra edid dre VA 252 CONOC bua 43s PS TN GAS es 260 242 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id O Five Speed Automatic Transmission 262 AGE RIN TT 262 W AutoStick If Equipped 266 oO AutoStick 3 5L Engine spe em eas 266 oO AutoStick 5 7L Engine is xum bess 266 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 268 afde Es vie P E 268 Bb ese PPP 268 N Driving Through Water 269 O Flowing Rising Water sesse see 269 N Power Steering ss SS ss se 271 O Power Steering Fluid Check aes vce em dures 212 aM Parking Brake ao osse Ie COE RR ERR EC DE 273 O Manual Transmission If Equipped D Automatic Transmission If Equipped ll Brake System D Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped ll Electronic Brake Control System O Anti Lock Brake System ABS
113. G up aos 124 Seatback Release eee eee 124 in C AE EE EES EES EET 118 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 391 422 Selection of Oil sis s 8644 Ko sion EUR ES 379 entry Key Immobilizer 23594 293 yv vs 16 Sentry Key Programming sess 17 Sentry Key Replacement ios es sum RR D saas 17 Service Assistance llle 445 Service Contract ese Re hic ea heres dedo os 447 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator ES SS 176 Service Manuals leen 449 Setting the Clock smee eee BE 4 193 194 198 208 Denies 1 ere 4 4 sx 53 ou Gb Ue Seded es 189 Shit Indieatot Light 44 5445 ar ER P Eee obs 256 DEUS Goa Gore sete ae nae 4 eee PU Re RE ES 207 Automatic Transmission 257 262 Shoulder Belts 2 ena 44 2 5 oo de eet fed p X Oo 37 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 238 oignal UU sos ER eee PR TUR gh a O d 75 130 167 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 268 DOW IS au pee eae adr eur does ER HR 304 Sound System ele se OE OE OR OE OE ER 228 Date E Prnt 299 991 vor id MISS E C EE N LG 422 Specifications Fuel Gasoline os ais 64494044494 eh domes 422 OI ee err 454 ARE EDE RR ee ee ee 422 Speed Control Cruise Control 137 wes rrr 165 ign so oa oo ee he eee HO EE S 26 245 OAV id Automatic Transmission ieke KERSE ER Re 246 Cold Wedathe serisi tiitrite dA BO Eoi debe d
114. HICLE 377 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these service manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTIO
115. HICLE M WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the MAX mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine
116. Hazard Warning Flasher s 339 Heada Nt OWING PIDE 127 POOG rr 127 415 Headlights On Reminder i s ie vri 129 Headlights On With Wipers 128 135 Hich Beam ooo oek RES KEY Ee E 131 169 464 INDEX NEE NN Eish Beant Indicator ies RS RED RR ASE RE DE 169 High Beam Low Beam Select 131 Muminaled ENUY uos a xe eee de tabe S aeea 20 Instrument Cluster n 127 165 Hense orrel lt a riisi deed uia eA SEE 133 Interior x oux ood IE HOT SA RE 133 141 LIONS sb ae ER ORE EX FPE RU DAS 420 Liens On Reminder sis dues sedem ehe d DRR 129 Low Fuel a Sedo dee AR AES OE RAD T 176 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 176 Map beding 2s 9x6 Spe RE SPI nays E 132 141 GI on rr 169 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 99 Passe dugerg s cee aides E OR A UE dca 131 Dg P eed aa ie oi RR AR Wi 132 141 Seat Belt Reminder SS SS SS 169 Security Alarm Theft Alarm s 22024 64 24 en 174 CIVICE 2134444 ORE EL OO ES 414 415 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 176 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 174 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 174 305 Traeuot CONTO 2e a xem Rene bad vue wd 286 TU Sid a she p oe ee ae bs ees amp 75 130 167 NOn MOTOT aids a use 4 9 3 E998 Ee da de es 84 VOICE hegre be Ais EE 3 8 0 9 99 M ORE 3 165 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 165 Leading Vehiele s 2e somnos aedeagus O27 DES dior MP OAR 323 i Tr 292 SOCK
117. Memo to record a new memo During the e Delete All to delete all memos recording you may press the Voice Command EVR System Setup Ee button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you the following commands may say the following commands Save to save the memo e Language German Continue to continue recording e Language Dutch Delete to delete the recording e Language Italian e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos Language English During the playback you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands e Language Spanish e Language French Repeat to repeat a memo e Tutorial Next to play the next memo e Voice Training 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command SVR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 R
118. N Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 3 5L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 regular intervals such as every fuel stop The bes
119. N Go icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position 041008156 Keyless Enter N Go Display The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the new ignition switch position If desired the ignition switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display appears 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Starting And Operat ing for more information NOTE Under certain conditions the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority But when the ignition switch position is changed the display always re appears Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides infor mation on the current surround mode e Stereo e Video Surround e Audio Surround While in the Surround Sound menu press the FUNC TION SELECT button to change surround modes The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction ry the vehicle is facing Press and release the HOME button to display one of eight compass HOME readings and the outside temperature Button NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and m
120. NDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 034607292 Front Power Outlet The center console power outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw e After the use of high power draw accessories or power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert
121. NDEX NEE id else 2 AAR Ed EAE IMPRESS tS P 232 Heater Engine BIOCK uua dccem FR WERE 252 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 131 Hill Start Assist SS ss ss ES eee 281 Hitches Taner TOE 22src6uhoeeg ame Gee eg o 326 biol es CUP be kata arati REP E EP RE MEUS 155 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 142 Hood Release Ss eee ee OR ERE PSG ee e 126 fantin e fm ada pw re Bh eae Od FEE EE OF 14 No a uu RE RE ee ee ee TET 12 14 Ignition Key Removal out 2x news ae cage 14 Muminated EOY sain ig 303 40b dnx Ege ria Ae ed 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key i222 en un ew ns 16 Infant Restraint s zorra ote dn bees S REA 61 62 Information Center Vehicle naan anaana 178 Instrument Cluster x24 9 ps6 EER ER 163 165 Instrument Panel and Controls 162 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 406 Integrated Power Module Fuses 407 interior Appearance Care usa qais soni d we 404 INGCHOP ICING suce sans en awe goi ache aod o rab RR 133 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 134 EO UE HORE soes datas eee ets aor seen Ras Jack Location asse 46 4846444666400 66085 951 Jack Operation oi ee ene covets wd d E EE 354 Jacking Instructions das eek 0448 e rhon d HA DU 354 JUNO State oan 28a eee e se heh one URE 361 ker PROG OIMINING has gece Me ie e oe ER oe RE 17 Key Replacement Pr 17 Key Sentry Immobilizer 54 une devo nee nae oars 16 Kev Reminder os es E eupd d OA EUR HERRIE VRA
122. NG Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the shift lever to the left The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down AutoStick 5 7L Engine AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the right or left D D while in the DRIVE position The gear position will display in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up and down when left or right D D is manually selected by the driver It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho sen The transmission will autom
123. NING YOUR VEHICLE M S CAUTION When installing the power distribution center cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 81100354 Rear Power Distribution Center Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 1 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD Yellow Cavity 1 of the Rear Power Distribution Center contains a black IOD fuse needed for vehicle processing dur ing assembly The ser vice replacement part is a 60 Amp yellow car tridge fuse 2 40 Amp Integrated Power Mod Green ule IPM MEE NEM M EEN E 40 Amp Integrated Power Mod Green ule IPM MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Mini Description Fuse Heated Seats If Equipped 20 Amp Fuel Pump Yellow 15 Amp Sub Amp If Equipped Blue 15 Amp Diagnostic Link Connec Blue tor DLC Wireless Con trol Module WCM Wireless Ignition Node WIN 20 Amp Power Outlet Yellow 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fu
124. Off Operation 96 poe 4s ne oe lt 3 1952 O Sunroof Fully Closed 22 ses 152 Bl Electrical Power Outlets 152 W Cupholders MEE ER OE ders e EE ON 155 LE Eront Cupholders ues wa ER eh ns 155 Ee CUPNOIGNS PPM E 156 Bl Console Features sellers 156 O Sliding Center Console Armrest 156 EMConscle DIOFIPE a oscuro RAS SY atid oes Hs 157 W Rear Window Features 158 O Rear Window Delfoster ie etwas et seesi 158 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other ob
125. Remote Start in the Remote Start mode System windows door locks or other controls I e The engine can be started two consecutive times with could cause serious injury or death the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START STOP button twice or the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle e Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button If the SIART STOP button is not present insert
126. S are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 21 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed i Fach tire including the spare if provided by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
127. S P 29 Auto Unlock asser aerks E LIA SE RW YN 2 ES 31 Automatic Door cx uu oso Eo en o DAE dns 30 DOr PV ya E 29 loner DOOF 5224424056 e AR PR Xeno REK ee 30 Low lire Pressure System usse ems dd RE 305 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCED MEDE EO 2644050 ESSE EUR RR S 65 66 L prication Dody a oueececk aor e xor Sep Shed 385 N INDEX 165 Lambar Si OOM iis EkER AL MES REISE ER DS 121 Maintenance Free Battery cia od RARR ed aya 382 Maintenance General sess 377 Maintenance Procedures een 8 Maintenance Schedule 426 Maintenance Sunroof SS SE 152 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 176 375 Manual Service uec woo Pu ex Ea GEM S Was 449 Manual Transmission 253 398 401 Fluid Level Check 12 225229 9m ces 398 401 Map Reading Lights 132 141 Master Cylinder Brakes 0 396 Methanol EEN E Rm 4 AE d SUS 315 its Bap CODIDUEPGE s riasami mee RARR e Rd 182 NUS 4 eee oes OE 435 X BURNER EE ERE WA 81 Automabc INANE iss Qm vd ee acp E d 81 Electric Powered ges 83 Electric Remote a RS 83 Extenor Fod usus 555 Rx eee elas eee 82 Heated 44 baa ee eee ee eas eee eee ees 83 eco 82 NONUMY M C r Pe 84 Mode Fuel Sayet OAAR ARE EE KEER EE IAE 182 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System ui
128. S EN 367 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M e Youcan also turn th
129. START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and holding the ENGINE START STOP button Release the button when the engine starts If the vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds release the button wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting proce dure If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting release the button To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a VEHICLE NOT IN PARK message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engi
130. STOP button is installed and the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter is in the passenger compart ment Keyless Go 050105203 Installing and Removing the ENGINE START STOP Button Installing the Button 1 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 2 Insert the ENGINE START STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable 3 Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position Removing the Button 1 The ENGINE START STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch for key fob use 2 Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o clock position and gently pry the button loose 248 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE The ENGINE START STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF position Normal Starting Using the ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again Using the ENGINE
131. Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Securing TIRE FIT Sealant in the Tire CAUTION e The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so should be handled carefully Failure to reinstall the yellow cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant contacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s interior It can also result in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit D Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349 WARNING TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h until having the tire repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you E After Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire Follow Step A Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT before continuing 1 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Air Mode position 2 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 and con
132. Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road m
133. T QE CS vd e MI 4WD BRAKE mige 2n MEAN WeMDOW ELFZTESCALL PAN LIGTE WEAR FOO LAMP AL DEFWOST AND VENTILATING AS WIP DZRWADICR ROTE FORM WEED a oet HL DEFROST HEATED l OPEN LOWEN AA OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE 7 70 q wv J ho N tow DE poU HAUL BATTERY ise ATET dnte ua TE ad tre AAT li Lipi JOM pad Am CONDITA CHALD SEAT ini cecmirio Puch TERN i AL OHAFGINS TETHEN ARTHA S e 40 A i OO CA w LOW LOWE ANDREAS iW FLUR PORER VESEL KI WEER DOE ABAD SLID DOOD UM LOKTEN ANU TETHER EON UcNMECIT HAZARD EDU WHEEL STEERING FLUO AUD AE CHPLEREN LATCH BITTIDA DTE LA CY e E RIRERG qap d 1i F 2 PUSH OFF MALFUMCTION ENPRE COGLANT Sumi EMEHTAL WEE DERE ALIAM CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE BEE DERE MH ELESTROMIE INIBCATDHAE Lec oli TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAMTHYEZTEM ATFEAG OFF TOF DOWN TOF HE MARA ERI TXONDITIOHER READ ET EONTRERL OFF n10507683 6 INTRODUCTION M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears
134. TETEE 423 DUO eara HER oe Sake AD es 262 DPeCIaLAUGINVeS 24134 tuned eee oe ed ota aca 400 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 265 wing A C P 266 vdd rpm 423 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 423 cni AC 382 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Location 4 44 4 624 4 ide PE bbe ew eS 382 Bells Dede a uu 8 Ree aes Cas eee ee 37 73 Body Mechanism Lubrication 385 B Pillar Location aa 2 4 5 24442 dbs Ee eda 292 Brake Assist Systemi ace vanes RE eee be EDS 280 Brake Control System Electronic 279 Brake Fluid 0 00 00 0000000008 423 Dake AEE ipsu OE TEE as es 273 Drake SUSIE sus aas wade Nes Oo d ceo eee s 276 395 Anti Lock ABS 4 ve sees y 276 279 Faid Check 2 332 ek ee ESS 396 423 Master Cyne aa te bes HR EER 2 3 9 HG HR DE 396 Ik aid EE ROL EE RES IE 273 Warne Light oos bessie AR RE HE pen 172 276 DIES 12 22 22A be ee oe ES bees 276 395 Brake Transmission Interlock 260 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 70 Brightness Interior Lights 456 INDEX NEE Id Bulb Replacement sis 2 9 3c9 44 754 ER DE E 414 415 Bulbs E15 4264340046 MA BE vd Ra Eae od 75 44 Calibration Compass iac GEE op xs 187 Capacities FUNG uos dido 8 9x Seg ad en rar Pha 421 Caps Filler lo ETT 919 EE de tae cagee ees SEE KAP ES RARE 380 Power Dieet cores see ew sae 4 VES Tes 272 Radiator Coolant Pressure 393 Cale Wash
135. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After placing the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of th
136. TURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Mist Feature Push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the second detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Headlights On With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the A AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were
137. U L E S 8 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect exhaust system Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Inspect and replace PCV valve if damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary necessary 1 Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped Inspect the rear axle fluid Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 3 5L Engine Repl
138. W towable for your given drivetrain ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry YOY vehicle Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1587 Kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain 328 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Max GTW Gross Trailer Max Tongue Wt Wt 12 sq ft 1 11 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 12 sq ft 1 11 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed
139. With the RKE ransmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves of the case together Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves If equipped install and tighten the screw until snug Test RKE transmitter operation General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Cl
140. abel to assure optimum operation of the sys bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts tem Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F ies tpe gu iii EA id Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement P 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 is a one tire avoid injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant application use After each use always immediately is only intended to seal punctures less than Va 6mm replace these components at an authorized dealer diameter in the tread of your vehicle e When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form clean e Do not lift or carry TIREFIT kit by hoses 2 water and a damp cloth will remove the material from WARNING e Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded vehicle close to traffic Pull far enough off the road e For optimum performance make sure the valve stem to avoid the danger of being hit when using the on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit TIREFIT kit Continued 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the e A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision following circumstances If the cut or puncture in the tire tread is approxi mately
141. able the feature customers must park their vehicles with the blower control set in any of the four blower speeds NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 If Outside Ambient Mode Overrides To Temperature Overrides To Rear Window Defroster Temperature Is E M Less than 40 F Full Heat Between 40 F and 80 F More than 80 F Full Cool NOTE Summer Operation e The feature can be disable by parking the vehicle with The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles ru the blower control set to the O or OFF position must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Operating Tips Vehicle for proper coolant selection e For maximum performance it is recommended that the vehicle is parked with the blower control set to the High full clockwise position NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Winter Operation suggested control settings for various weather condi Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months tions is not recommended because it may cause window fogging 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system a
142. ace the timing belt 3 5L Engine Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires I Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary _J Inspect the rear axle fluid _I Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary L1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rota
143. ad files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize
144. age your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engi
145. ain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with one window open then open the other window to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to mini mize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button The button is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate If equipped with a manual transmis sion the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph 8 km h before the button will operate The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button on the Re mote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitte
146. ain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug paint and decals and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive and to protect your paint finish Take care never to near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once scratch the paint a month e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e It is important that the dra
147. ained follow these steps 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful
148. ally hot If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos sible Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 12 Electronic Stability Program ESP If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warn ing Light comes on continuously with the engine run ning a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several ESP BAS miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING If the warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS You should adjust your speed and stopping
149. ant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 5 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approxi mately 70 psi 5 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indi cated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes e The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation Button and the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn off the TIREFIT kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instrument panel 3 Immediately disconnect the
150. ase the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Ad
151. at is not equipped with seats and seat passengers adieu too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident best Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch der is routed through the seat web guide When the belt plate into the buckle until you hear a click is routed outside of the seat web guide the latch plate will contact the quarter trim panel Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your n Latch Plate To Buckle Latch Plate 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your
152. atically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear Tapping the shift lever to the D position at a stop will allow starting in second gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift D the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right D for a few seconds You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury e You can start out in first or second gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop e Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions 268 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear e Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged e The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while AutoStick is engaged e Transmission shifting will be more crisp abrupt when AutoStick is engaged DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow
153. au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the CAUTION fluid level accurately e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Continued 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The
154. ay add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
155. ay be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts p All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle th
156. ay need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the HOME button for approximately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between
157. ay need to be driven for up to a d 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the a ae P 1 TPMS to receive this information 819793fc 312 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not received z m Sumus g Foa News 81979401 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 313 Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tir
158. book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the eo button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use
159. cal area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you
160. ccordance with local laws WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control both of the door windows EE EER Power Window Switches There is a single window control on the passenger s door trim panel that operates the window on the passenger s door The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE e The door window will lower slightly if it is closed completely when opening the door The window will return to its fully closed position after closing the door This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and seal damage WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver s door power window switch and passenger door power window switch have an AUTO down fea ture Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly The power window switches will rem
161. ch tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of three lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the Uconnect gps if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you con tinue the information will display in the selected lan guage NOTE The EVIC will not change the Uconnect lan guage selection Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected both doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected both doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the fir
162. changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grades refer to Mainte nance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 CAUTION WARNING Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death NOTE Anew engine may consume some oil during its It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people should be considered a normal part of the break in and riding in these areas are more likely to be seri not interpreted as an indication of difficulty ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your SAFETY MS vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Transporting Passengers belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat belt properly 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing
163. choose the phone you wish to delete N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the vn button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the vr button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Command system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak norma
164. cle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of this vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Mainte serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test the vehicle may fail the test This vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if this vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert the key fob into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two thi
165. cluding but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Never
166. connect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button
167. coolant recovery evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the i i P d lean e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the e radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VE
168. covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop Your vehicle is equipped with a Limited Slip Differential LSD that reduces but does not eliminate the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowin
169. ctive for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or MET RIC appears MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu select
170. d be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni tion system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Normal Starting with Integrated Key Manual Transmission Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor and turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 246 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING CAUTION Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con verter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop a discharged battery booster cables may be used to Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the obtain a start from another
171. d the wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa tion The parking brake must remain engaged unless the vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow vehicle or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled See your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal and reinstallation procedures including flange orientation alignment use of thread locking compound proper bolt torque specifications etc WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher B If Your Engine Overheats B TIREFIT Kit If Equipped ELTIRBELI Strate iuueni gem H TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation O TIREFIT Usage Precautions O Sealing a Tire With TIREFIT Bl Jacking And Tire Changing H Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 339 340 341 341 343 345 351 351 O Preparations For Jacking O Jacking And Changing a Tire O Compact Spare Tire o Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation I Equipped es ll Jump Starting Procedures O Preparations For Jump Start H Jump Starting Procedure N Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Mi Towing A Disabled Vehicle anan 366 D Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 5 Without The Key FOB 0 0 ee EE ROMO E oo D Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The is ia 256 4a ARE Se 2 obs EG N
172. decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit format types program type Character Display Program Type 16 Digit 5 YP Character Display or undefined Religious Talk Rel Talk Classic Rock Cls Rock NE UNDERST
173. ded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX oe Id About Your Brakes len 273 276 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 276 279 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 992 POCO EU 20 us ote arx por ee p SUP RC Re don en 219 Adding Washer Fluid ssc ed dabo e eae wes 386 diie GUC aras v dod ent oe Hp d RE ge as 317 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 382 Air Conditioner Maintenance 384 PIPCONCIMONING oe 43 eyuvete ere PS Te 232 Air Conditioning Controls aseo Less car HR 202 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 239 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 384 385 Air Conditioning System 232 384 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 00 0000 e ee 297 ur eae ena 47 56 Airbag Deployment ses ia riris HER ERRORI ed D ANDIE
174. dge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com N rx YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must c
175. draulic brake lines It can overload your brake brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over i accident 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 9 779 O O QO Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5
176. e but should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED 045105297 Remote Sound System Controls The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster VOLUME Button The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to decrease the sound level AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio and media mode information depending on which radio is in the vehicle If the Compass Temp Audio screen is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 mode will change i e from AM to FM to Media mode etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle FUNCTION SELECT Button When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen press the FUNCTION SELECT button to operate various radio media and Universal Customer Interface UCI functions i e advance presets select next folder jump to or
177. e doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ieee WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS XX The multifunction lever operates the windshield NS wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the RUN position The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 81f3862c Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to select the desired delay interval There are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEA
178. e lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list pressing this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing o
179. e Door Opener HomeLink 142 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap iacu icis digo d d 319 374 Gasoline Clean Airt xu oes uer 4 eee EPRT S AD eee 315 Gasoline Fuel leen 314 CODSCIVINE segai a ont d Puta ER ded qe ae 182 Gasoline Reformulated 315 Gauges Coolant Temperature 22222222 9 De EE 166 Euh TEST EES RE ONE nego TU 165 Odometer 0 ee ees 170 vierten FD 165 Tachometer otaku se ex bab SERA EERE dee ad 165 General Information 17 25 113 314 General Maintenance less oes frr Xe rn FTT Da HEDE RAAD OR es 405 Gross Axle Weight Rating 322 325 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 322 324 GVW ass eee 05292299557 54225 027 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 85 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water sess 269 Hazard Warning Flasher sses 206 uem a eta ees 339 Head Restrainis oo ojos ORR Re SR eae HORE 3 121 Lead HE idea EL DRA cas E Pansa gd Es d 415 Autoniali uuu Sure deben eee RES es 128 Bulb Replacement sos we ag DE ER ER x PE 415 8 Dacia ee naan EE oe Bard ea dod d 405 pr A EE oe oe ee oe Pete 128 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 191 Lights On ISGmulid BE sx saa gia ve ines n 129 On With Wipers 26 24 wed 4 ed eoe 129 195 Passe C 131 vane P AR OAR OIE TEE 127 tie Del 246444404 2054 s Cuma ees ER 128 Heated MITOS uius es sew oho ESI RENT A 83 Heated Seats 462 I
180. e Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 277 You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS contains so phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus ceptible to interference caused by improperly in e The clicking sound of solenoid valves stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end such equipment should be performed by qualified of the stop professionals Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a c
181. e Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in OFF At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference 1
182. e available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle 204 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib od Occupant 3 160 Ibs AER 100 Ibs 3S Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 295 296 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause coll
183. e does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the IPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
184. e names in the list press the 6 VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the
185. e or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other Ways 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING WARNING Continued Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure
186. e someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately Information Provided by DEEFNLER UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS hyfsro PPP 81 o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 81 Aade MITOS yay ota eee ears HOT SE 82 H Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 82 EE ower MITO sko EE kh et SEER DT edes 63 o Heated Mirrors If Equipped 83 EMS MMOS ide demp sees RS eu 83 O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors 84 O Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of OUI WISOl e dress os oo 4 dus Sepa te eee 84 ll Uconnect Phone If Equipped 85 ED COBEEOLHOUE paved cs o v ded dr OE RAAD 87 EL Phone Call Teatres sleeper b BR AE 95 H Uconnect Phone Features auo vez dewsws 98 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 103 H Things You Should Know About Your Weonmect PRONG e strud aca rad aon a es 105 O General Information 113 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM ll Voice Command
187. e temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 F 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains at 240 F 116 C or greater and you hear a chime turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot TIREFIT KIT IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to 1 4 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 88 km hr WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 TIREFIT Storage TIREFIT Kit Components
188. e to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Overhead Console N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either place the ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and if equipped the lighting in the door map pockets door handles and cupholders Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off position The interior lights will remain off when th
189. e your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone if equipped power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered power out lets will remain a
190. ea where you place your fingers to unlatch the hoses 6 7 from their storage area 3 Use the yellow cap on end of the Sealant Hose 6 to depress the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 to the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing and the alignment keys on the bottom of the bottle align with the alignment slots in the housing Then press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked in place 6 Verify the yellow cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle NN WHATTODO NEMERGENCIES 351 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Continued WARNING e The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm
191. eaded Gasoline 0 000000 G 314 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 2s bx EE 42 Ne INDEX 473 Vanity MINO si dus dE IMPO A PREX 44449 wads 84 Vattance COMPASS sis or RR SR RR ag 90 ED WEEN 187 Vehicle Certification Label sis EER REG HR AR 322 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 vehicle oa eese Gas ea iie sda 202 922 923 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Velie DONITE eese ter Porson tees ao ee ee 238 414 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 18 Vise ip DESEE Ol is eger vent tue e yd we 9 ues 380 Voice Recognition System VR ls 113 Warning Flasher Hazard 339 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 165 Warnings and Cautions 453 4 aces d acp RC Ret d 6 Warranty Information s x ap E RR 448 Washer Adding Puid s esae AREE eR ems 386 Washers Windshield 134 135 386 Washing Veliiel i ice o ebd e044 geese dr 402 Water Drivine TROUGH 2a snbaueg pe PEG Heese es 269 Wheel ana Wheel Trim same dese ses ier RE ES 403 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care iussus 403 Wind se die eie 29299 ES A eta xa EE 33 151 Window POBRE 2245245 oe ER ue EE 238 VHS uua bu s 39 S AIO EE GERENS ME E NR SA 32 DOWI nesre nimikiri Ries PE GEOG Adr Ed P des 32 Windshicla Detmoster ie pd vig EVA eee oe ik Windshield Washers 134 135 TAC ots ore Oe EA REEKSE Id DERE 386 Windshield Wiper Blades ss Ese 386 Wi
192. ed with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light 308 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components
193. ees oe gs 287 Tire Safety IM Ormation 4 cuu ee E gore SU RES 287 TREE 225x229 549 P AESIPESAMME EOS oa ss ia Gin eG hhh on bh Sa ene Rt da lu d v 75 296 451 SEE Gah aes WAARDES RD ROSE eae Se AE meine Lic Gr lites 424 cepa eeu DEAR R oars N sa tac ee acne d CRAS centers oe es Ait Presse P 296 pare Tie nian yen owe es ok RAS AE OR is su 546 654 ved obo EET eH a oH 351 354 OPUS etus aces 05 6 oe AP x d A ERA Compact Opare cagaaudeses aus Pase etos cane 299 Trailer LOWING iu aae Race ER d ner eoi d Fiat GEES ING ese are REID Ese een HS e be 351 Tread Wear IndieatobS sac a cip HERDER DER DI General Iniormaion sis bes o ideo anu ER acere 206 To Oe Hood sere EER KOOS es PARE RR ERE PO geed se d cv49939r2 AO AD 90 299 Tongue Weieht Trailer Weight 2o iR EE Inflation Pressures a scies es EE DR rt N Re 207 UP m ru s so eae ene CS ee ae be es Da 353 354 24 Hour Towing Assistance SOR DES AREA PX RA REUS SUE ON 302 Behind a Motor Home uv eor EET Load COPIE uev doen sese de ao xe d eR 292 Disabled Vehide acts cee teas mah EA Re ER ed Pressure Monitor System TPMS 305 CUIUS 342554444455 RURS Fes Ead us EX Pressure Warning LIBE ui ene sd N mne 174 KROorealional iis sone KERR d bd d RR AE Quality Grading csceee yao eee oa SOROR en 451 Dp rei as HEG EER OR HOKKE RA IKE BRA cur EE EES ER EE EE EE 297 OWING ASSISIMIKC 23g he ORE eee HE epiek P 302 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home RO
194. eeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will WARNING decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any pressure cap while the system is hot or under accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in o
195. ehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 WARNING POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good e Driving through standing water limits your vehi vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical 8 km h when driving through standing water steering capability if power assist is lost Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you NOTE stranded e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effo
196. eight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection procedure This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for the proper tire Towing Requirements Tires replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact GVWR and GAWR limits spare tire ra E Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or Tires General Information in Starting and Oper vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer ating for proper tire inflation procedures This could cause inadequate braking and possible E personal injury Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage 332 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is WARNING required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic hy
197. either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the e
198. el cover on the compact spare However when reinstalling the road tire follow the procedure under Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installa tion in place of the remaining steps in this procedure Jack Engagement Locations 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 9 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft lb 135 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is en
199. elts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 E then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint Tether Strap Va 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tet
200. em if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three stra
201. em immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e How far if at all the driver was depressin
202. en it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty 5 weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWRs TRAILER TOWING Manual Transmission If Equipped Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as effic
203. ent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you STARTING AND OPERATING 319 WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired
204. epeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions The power seat switch can be moved forward and backward as well as up and down to control the position of the seat The power seatback N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 switch is used to adjust the angle of the seatback Push WARNING forward or rearward on the switch to change the position of the seatback Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is ee ES QUT dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is par
205. er ORC e Airbag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column e nstrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Airbag Passenger Advanced Front Airbag N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC WARNING F ide e Front and Side Impact Sensors e No objects should be placed over or near the e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch airbag on the instrument panel because any such and Seat Track Position Sensors objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to Advanced Front Airbag Features inflate The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as o determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC damage the airbags and you could be injured which may receive information from the front impact because the airbags may no longer be functional sensors The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an ing impact that requires airbag deployment This low output Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is any way used for more severe collisions Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers
206. er Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MANTENANCE SCHEDULES 431 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine _J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedu
207. erly stowed BeltAlert Programming The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de activating the BeltAlert 1 With both doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON RUN or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this pro cedure NOTE When the BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that p
208. ery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and DRIVE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Stability Program or Traction Control in Starting and Oper ating for further information CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failu
209. es Cr CPI 402 Carbon Monoxide Warning 72 910 Cargo Vehicle Loading se cesera ri HR ca 322 Cellular PRONE 43552554322 393 taeda ches 85 232 Center High Mounted Stop Light 419 Cerbhicabon Label 4 euaa v dox acu a thd RR WER 322 Chaneme A Flat Te ous soe a DOER RE RR PER 951 Clery Tie Oe sides ess SES ET REPE 288 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 375 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 71 Gul coca rm 71 Child Resttaint gie n AD EE DEM isi 61 63 66 68 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 65 66 Cleat Alr Gasoline rsi RE 4 8505 e46aGe ES DI 315 Cleaning WG L3 scevdoran V s ED HYS we ee tees 403 Windshield Wiper Blades 386 S DP 193 194 198 208 Cold Weather Operation us scie seu zkep teens 250 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 231 Compact Spare IHE asus EER Die Rx SUR 299 Sonn C 186 Compass Calibration 4645492 RE ava be oe 44 187 Compass Vallance 649 0653 ER ob Ee Gees 187 Computer rip Travel ree HE HR ER primii 182 a EEEELLSLIILLIGIIIIUUIUUIIIILIIIULLLLILLLIRLLEL GL LLINLEDLUt IU IIiIao AALu L4 OG 4CGoq J GGUGuolqLLL GOLI UUO UBA 494UUOluliu INDEX 457 Connector VEL ENE egos eee ee ee E 218 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 218 Conserving Fuel esse tos e SES Son uei ds 182 CORDE uus x 5963 AS ARE eee ee Pu a ee 156 Console PIGOE 234646485 eb ENS ERROR RARE 156 Console Overhead
210. ets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use DEFROST mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in RECIRCULATION mode Only use the RECIR CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 NOTE e If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the system is in MIX DEFROST or FLOOR mode the RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times and then turn off to indicate RECIRCULATION mode is not allowed e Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e In cold or damp weather the use of the RE
211. fascia will result e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles If the transmission is not operative or if the 24 km vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 24 km or faster than 30 mph 48 kph then the only approved method of towing is with a flatbed truck Otherwise damage to the transmission may result Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Continued e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h CAUTION Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Continued e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the RUN position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 3 5L 972 N Engine Compartment 5 7L 373 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 374 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap uas esed Bi Ek ER ed 374 N Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
212. fety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods
213. for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several selections of air distribu tion You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel Mode 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow 045607541 NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Bi Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode R Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Mode Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side el window demist outl
214. freeze Engine Coolant Engine Oil Door Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses 409 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 137 Electronic Stability Program ESP s 283 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 166 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 178 Emergency Deck Lid Release 35 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 365 Hazard Warning Flasher org doe ee hae a 339 be si TE N EE ah EE AE d dod d 351 Jump SPUNE Gea g niee os p Ronde as E d 361 Oierli li eer E EERS r qud EP ERAS 339 TOWING OR EET aea e eee a 366 Emergency Trunk Release 42 is sus nag Rd be RES 39 Emission Control System Maintenance 375 426 Lise sos be OE ARE ee HEAD BY eh 372 373 Air Cleaner sees one SS ER Le eS 382 Block Heater idc erbe hee noe ens 252 Break In Recommendations 70 a EEEEELLSLIILLILIIIIUIIILIIIIUIIULLIII LILL LILELCL LLUU LU LUEA LIL eLLLL bLELICD ILLEUIILLL LUXLpnIAIKLLEIUAUICLdLDAG uLIud INDEX 459 Cheekmne Oil bevel 225 as qs RE EE ER 378 CONPDOIEUMGUI serret qe do Sot UP PER 9 2 9 9 Coolant Antifreeze 390 422 Son RC RA 390 Exhaust Gas Caution
215. g To initiate three way calling press the VR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Xe button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone
216. g Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Always check the depth of the standing water e Driving through standing water may cause dam before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the v
217. g the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie
218. gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Maintaining Your Vehicle and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear a chime turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service 9 Turn Signal Indicators Ca The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE e A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 10 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first PN turned to the ON RUN position If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things Io Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light will turn on and a single chime will jee sound to warn of an overheated engine condition When this light turns on the engine temperature is critic
219. ghted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 449 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy
220. gineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity e Keep tire inflated to 60 psi 414 KPa cold inflation pressure e This tire is designed as an emergency spare only Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h speed N WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 359 WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation If Equipped NOTE Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare 1 Mount the road tire on the axle For vehicles equipped with wheel covers perform Steps 2 and 3 For vehicles equipped with center caps proceed to Step 4 2 Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the
221. he ACC or RUN position Do not start the engine Then follow the in 5 structions shown above to activate the override Interlock Manual Override 262 STARTING AND OPERATING M Five Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears ene Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 263 WARNING CAUTION Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned when parked to guard against
222. he call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vn button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the vm button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Svea button and say Iransfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the button to begin
223. he conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the ABS Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light remain on the ABS and EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESP This system includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS the Traction Control System TCS the Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Program ESP These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill Start Assist HSA is standard on manual transmission models Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating
224. he multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a con tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second tim
225. he other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning e Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warn
226. he sounds will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings U S DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 81f05e05 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades STARTING AND OPERATING 287 NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M 288 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Do not use two different size tires on the rear wheels as this can result in rear axle damage Tire Sizing Chart TIRE SIZING TERMS P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T
227. he vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between 34 and lt 4 Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 79 and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If its sunny set the Mode control at or between and J then turn the air 6460 conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn T 6 dag the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and SP COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS i this case set the Mode control at or between and 23 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 D 045608611 Information Provided by DEEFNLER STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures ins mes emo rm 245 W
228. her strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNINCG An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the drivetrain engine transmission clutch and rear axle in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 500 mi 800 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in However wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high quality and energy conserving Oil fluid and lubricant
229. here the word Save is displayed MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate SING NPI Ca TE N TIME LE DISC 042305232 Media Center 130 RES UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours
230. i tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodical
231. ic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information e When not using the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 3 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between OFF and ON RUN and then back to OFF four times ending up in the LOCK position However do not start the engine 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 4 Within 30 seconds press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 5 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure 6 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in a
232. icle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Door Lock Knob 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Power Door Locks locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden The power door lock switch is located on each door trim tally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled The transmission is in gear All doors are closed Power Door Lock Switch 2 3 4 The throttle is pressed 5 If you press the power door lock switch while the Key 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h Fob is in the ignition and either door is open the power NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer See your authorized dealer for programming Automat
233. iently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not e
234. ilure to do so could result in When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced STARTING AND OPERATING 301 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 302 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors in
235. in holes in the lower edges that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear finish and open N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutio
236. inate the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming process If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the door you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button until the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC indicates that the vehicle ignition is OFF refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Then either press the power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter LOCK button To Disarm The System Vehicles Not Equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the TRUNK button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Secu
237. incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Callin
238. ine 91 Octane Manual Transmission N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Manual Transmission If Equipped MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product ene Transmission If MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed Equip E NM ATF 4 product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power pese Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans pep Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Rear Axle 3 5L Engine MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W140 API GL 5 or equiva lent Rear Axle 5 7L Engine MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 API GL 5 or equivalent with MOPAR Friction Modifier Hypoid Gear Additive Information Provided by DEEFNLER MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS lll Emission Control System Maintenance 426 O Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 426 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to en
239. information e When not using the EVIC perform the following Steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock both doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Hor
240. ing Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Infla tor Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blin
241. ingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Partially Press and hold the switch in the rearward position Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving If you continue to hold the switch in the rearward position the sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Partially Press and hold the switch in the forward position Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving If you continue to hold the switch in the forward position the sunroof will close fully and then stop automatically Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Pinch Protect Feature
242. interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNING POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch or with the ignition in the Accessory or Run position for vehicles equipped with Keyless Go Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Power Sunroof Switch Continued 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your f
243. io to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attemp
244. iod of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should never install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system meets the seatback and are just visible when e you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel th
245. ion The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System VR If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the cu
246. irming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The Uconnect Phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that t
247. is will provide the best positioning of the kit when If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not Rican vomiting Consult a physician immedi valve stem in this position before proceeding ately Use the gloves provided in the Accessory Storage Compartment located on the bottom of the air 3 Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn OFF the ignition pump when operating the TIREFIT kit 4 Set the parking brake 2 Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT B Setting Up to Use TIREFIT A Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT 1 Remove the gloves from the Accessory Storage Com partment located on the bottom of the air pump and 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn ON the vehicle s place them on your hands Hazard Warning flashers 2 Turn the Mode Select Knob 5 to the Sealant Mode position 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 3 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the yellow cap from the fitting at the end of the hose 4 Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 5 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 6 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and then insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do
248. isions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in highe
249. isplay e Surround Sound modes if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Performance Pages Uconnect gps If Equipped System Warnings System Sta tus and Personal Settings FUNCTION SELECT Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept gt a selection The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote sound system con trol Refer to Remote Sound System Controls UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 SCROLL Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip A Functions Performance Pages Uconnect gps If Equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features The SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system control Refer to Remote Sound System Controls AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen Along with compass reading and outside temperature this screen will display radio and media mode information depending on which radio is in the vehicle Refer to Remote Sound System Controls 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On
250. jects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge The mirrors have one detent clockwise towards the rear of the vehicle and three detent s counterclockwise towards the front of the vehicle Folding Mirrors Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position uc veu ar ae D MDC D TIL DM Ud x c ee es us m esce s EES peus ss ER TES E eaaet um mn T t Nee RR REPAS SUM RR Be n EE uem ERA um un TR e ree EES EE can Um Tn mr m ar n Ju Power Mirror Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in
251. just the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or
252. k your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW B
253. ke pedal must be firmly pressed before the shift lock will release from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition 260 STARTING AND OPERATING M This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in DRIVE position After the transmission cools down it will return to normal operation Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped
254. ked CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Power Seat Switches 1 Power Seat Control 2 Power Seatback Control 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Front Seatback Recline 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright To recline position 1 Lean forward in the seat and lift the handle then lean WARNING lease the handle back to the desired position and re DE Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest E m In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Recline Lever NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Lumbar Support Head Restraints This feature allows you to increase or decrease the Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for of a rear impact The head restraints should be adjusted ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of amount of lumbar support your ear To raise it pull upward on the head restraint To T z E lower it press the button on the post guide and push downward on
255. l and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 hydraulic system malfunction In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNINCG Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System AB
256. le IPM 407 O Center High Mounted Stop Lamp oO Rear Power Distribution Center 409 eel LE nines aie drm ME E License MAM eeoye berate Pede dps IT 420 W Vehicle Storage MP EDE OE os 414 Nee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 W Fluid Capacities 421 E PHONE 4520444655 2e 5pueh2enuee aes 422 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 422 BOME IS Sout ean Boke bee ee DE ene OS 423 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L 1 Integrated Power Module 2 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir A 5 070910695 6 Engine Oil Fill 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 5 071406861 1 Integrated Power Module 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Coolant Pressure Cap 7 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 5 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic tra
257. le This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What to Do In Emergen cies for further information Clearing a Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing a Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the clutch pedal push the accelerator pedal all 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION the way to the floor and hold it then press and hold the ENGINE START STOP button for no more than 15 sec onds Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Clearing A Flooded Engine Using Fob With Integrated Key If the engi
258. le Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter H If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _I Rotate tires L1 Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule O C O O L L L L Change the engine oil and engine oil
259. le top down Phone Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connec tion can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Hecent Calls Last Enter Enter Number Name Number on Phone is redialed Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Main Menu d ce Emergency eem em Phonebook Francais See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones
260. ll be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 As NJ qo Xt De 2 4 e o xz mm si ECYHDHIC BTA SR ITT ATEN iH FUEL NEAR lk KA FXTEDICR EAR fiis OE AA TURM inda t LIFE AE HEATED BEAT ADJUSTAES E FLECTRONIC PADICANH MAANI WET FAILUME FPFF CONTRE jer de m TIS iui x 3 z y Q2 N ZO oi Wa 072 o FEL REAR WIMDCHN WINDSHIELD MASTER LOATH CENE Hen ANG LOWER HEATED I HEAT DEW LET TERE PRESSURE DIE LL DELET wina PARING WITETMETTENT APEN WEE FATEH PEREN CRITLET MDAITIRA a Oe P wn FU T 4 OR OG X Hat Qa g a FUEL FILL SE REAR WAN PRCA A DOME LEEK FHOHTFOS LOW HBOODRELEAHE LOWER AR amp ECIHCUILATIOR TOHVEITELE TRAAG TIM ALL ent FAILURE OP A4THLOCK MATETE FLA LEVEL Pm eT A WIMDCHN DERI FORT HAA SYEIEM 00 a a m GE v MI
261. ll display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 046405698 Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5 1 channel surround sound from NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 any stereo audio source A new feature of the KICKER audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source Audio Surround is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode NOTE Dependent on the audio source the output may sound better in stereo or DDS surround mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available in surround mod
262. lly without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertib
263. loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations for Jump Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump starting NOTE The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender 1 Remote Negative Post 2 Remote Positive Post Remote Battery Posts N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 363 WARNING 3 If using another vehicle to jump sta
264. lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 4 Wheel Cover 5 Mounting Stud 1 Valve Stem 2 Valve Notch 3 Wheel Lug Nut 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 4 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground 5 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft Ib 135 Nm If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station NN WHATTODO NEMERGENCIES 361 7 For vehicles equipped with center caps install the center cap by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the center cap 8 Stow the jack tools and spare tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING A
265. ly to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible ESP BAS 286 STARTING AND OPERATING M ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running The system will turn the ESP BAS Malfunction Indica tor Light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles kilome ters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP is synchronized refer to Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ESP BAS NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal t
266. ly with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographi
267. m will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving c
268. mergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e f supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your cellular phone must be e turned on e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Iowing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the
269. mming Additional Transmitters 25 O Trunk Emergency Release 35 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 W Occupant Restraints 00 36 O General Information 2s canceeeeaakeaca 25 H Lap Shoulder Belts as cues RASSE PLEK OES 37 ll Remote Starting System ses ss ss 26 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 42 O How To Use Remote Start 26 o Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode W Door Locks 2o rtr BE EE REFS 29 oe ET is H Manual Door LOCKS iese vs seak c ig n 29 ER DiE AE ar due i FPWR GOP GEES N N N 30 O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped 44 E Windows eel T a a OER O ode aetna ares ss ia O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 46 El Wind bulieting osse Bas ie eee hoe DEE 33 O Seat Belt Extender 2253693 mE 46 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 D Supplemental Restraint System SRS O Transporting Passengers 71 ae EE A si Hi did GAS 4 4544 te kee AS Vi N eee OR 72 0 Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 53 J Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The 2 D Event Data Recorder EDR 60 ie RE OT ENE EE OE OER 73 EC Iud Restraints inne dcum b tech aee aes ues 61 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 70 PMS LU emer ied ase Rear i W Saiety TIPS MERC 71 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyles
270. n The airbags work extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Continued Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On t
271. n is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 045607574 Manual Temperature Control N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Front Blower Control 045607577 There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control 045607540 temperatures NOTE Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the knob coun terclockwise from top center into the blue area indicates cooler tempera tures Rotating the knob clockwise into the red area indicates warmer If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator
272. n switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the ON RUN position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE RUN e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC displays IGNITION MODE OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehic
273. n the clutch Refer to Electronic Brake Control System Hill Start Assist in Start Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ing and Operating for further information Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor may cause increased shift efforts and may result Six Speed Manual Transmission in damage to the clutch and transmission MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while driving as this may result in transmission syn chronizer damage WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline 254 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE During cold weather you may experience in creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal 051705511 Manual Shifter Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal The six speed manual transmission has a spring that centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear This spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are shifting Be careful when shifting from first to second or downshifting from sixth to fifth The sp
274. n the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticed During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current CAUTION list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e Leaving the iPod or any suppo
275. n while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in
276. n with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information e When not using the EVIC perform the following I steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Remote Open Window Feature This feature allows you to remotely lower both door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to
277. nds and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for following Dusty or off road conditions damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Rotate tires Inspect the CV joints If using your vehicle for any of the Inspect exhaust system following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for replace if necessary damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go d
278. nds when the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles km A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer 9 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 4 Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is on 5 lachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area 6 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices ie radio or slightly increase engine speed if at idle If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check 7 when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there
279. ndshield VADERS sese sas Eeu ot 3 Re ee Pe 134 Wiper Blade Replacement 386 Wiper Deli moes arrap d RARR HER means 134 Wipers nte ERU 22 x 4 DEER he ER RADE 134 SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10D491 126 AD 4th Edition Printed in U S A f l C N bas Gas 6 amp
280. ne backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 WARNINCG Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery
281. ne fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one CAUTION hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine e Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear o
282. ne not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position To Turn Off the Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button Manual Transmission Only 1 With the vehicle stopped place the shift lever in NEUTRAL then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then apply the parking brake NOTE e If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position the system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position e If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position the system will automatically time out after 60 minutes of inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h and the engine is not running 250 STARTING AND OPERATING xe e If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph 8 km h the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position Keyless Go Functions With Driver s Foot OFF the Brake Pedal Clutch Pedal In PARK or NEUTRAL Position The Keyless Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignitio
283. ne oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engi
284. ne use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command vR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it
285. nect it to the valve stem 3 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 bar or higher 1 Press the Power Button 4 to on and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading informa tion label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the air pump is equipped with a Deflation Button and the tire becomes over inflated press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem and then reinstall the cap on the valve stem 3 Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser vice center 5 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement 1 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 2 Locate the rectangular Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed ar
286. ng conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the ERS or AutoStick mode and select the 3 range Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Mal function Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever into
287. ng the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to re
288. ngs will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that the vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that the vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If the OBD II system is not ready you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility If this vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether the vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have the vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VE
289. not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children wh
290. ns or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils
291. nsmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Trip Odometer button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehi
292. nt Wiper System 134 W Overhead Console 0 SVs ESOEIDIE 2353 oes 44456 4s KERSE DE 135 H Courtesy Keading Lights 240450444 2024 141 O Windshield Washers ss es 135 US ngldsses DIORdB ua soe REEDE ER 141 o Headlights On With Wipers Available With lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 142 Automatic Headlights Only 135 7 Programming HomeLink 143 N Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 136 ER Pmoemmmine 2 M I Flectronic Speed Control si ES ien Gear 137 Using HomeLink 2 0 0 0 ccc eee 147 El GAGNE os scs ok kta eke She a ees 138 O Reprogramming A Single HomeLink E lo Set A Desired Speed aude de eee 138 lio PPP enw Cm 147 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie El EED 2 4545 5n gt be EERW RD ee DIE ON ss 147 O Troubleshooting Tips d uro po 24 44a HD oe d 147 O General Information 148 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 149 B Opening Sunroof Partially 150 O Opening Sunroof Express 150 3 Closing Sunroof Partially 150 O Closing Sunroof Express 150 Pinch Protect Feature seesi snes eee rS ws 151 O Pinch Protect Override sisse e aram 151 O Venting Sunroof Express dol O Sunshade Operation gee ues evan d VD 151 El Wind Dollie ME se tenes oe SOR R ES EDE 151 O Sunroof Maintenance 22 2344 RR AE RE 132 E Tenition
293. nter EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key Fob in the ignition or a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In lgnition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go opening the driver s door when the vehicle s ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON RUN engine stopped will cause the reminder chime to sound Refer to Start ing Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information 16 THINGS
294. nual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires I Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary L Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary L1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D
295. o monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and TPM Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings a The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display one or more low pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible on ee 1 LL Sui and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value NIU T it Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the me lur system will automatically update the graphic display in FM the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light IV will turn off The vehicle m
296. o be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface UCI UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Refer to Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Equipped in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information Center Console 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window defroster only when the engine is operating window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT P
297. o do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified WARNING Continued to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument Assistance panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air WARNING bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collisio
298. o frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously tr
299. oer e Vehicle must be on a 7 grade or greater hill Hill Start Assist HSA Manual Transmission e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e Only vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when ing uphill is in REVERSE gear starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the 282 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Apply the parking brake Release the clutch pedal 2 3 4
300. off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Easy Entry Seats Pulling upward on the lever located on the seatback allows the seatback to dump forward and the seat to slide forward You can also temporarily remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to retract out of the way This allows for easier access to the rear seat Easy Entry Seats Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not
301. old that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Energy Management Feature This
302. ollision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS Continued 278 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from exces sive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning The capabilities of an Anti Lock Brake System ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Warning Light The Anti Lock Brake System ABS Warning Light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However t
303. ols the operation of the mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This shou headlights parking lights instrument panel lights instru secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless qu MM M m l light dimm lights and fog lights the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged ent panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death Headlight Switch 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Turn it to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition in the OFF position To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode
304. omfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or WARNING slouching can move the belt out of position e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back actly when installing an infant or child restraint NOTE For additional information refer to A rearward facing child restraint should only be www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy site for additional information http www tc gc ca ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm fatal injury to the infant N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Here are some tips on getting the most out of yo
305. on Sampling Frequency KHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX
306. on properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued ries may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the airbag syst
307. on the Automobile Information VIN Location Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN vehicle registration and the title EE INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS N Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death Information Provided by DEEFNLER THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Word About Your Keys 12 o Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 Elk os BOB PETRI 13 O Removing Key FOB From Ignition 14 O Key In Ignition Reminder l5 ese ROES SET ER NE 16 O Replacement Keys d ve m RE SR Rd es I7 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information I7 W Vehicle Security Alarm O Rearming Of The System Dlo Arm INe System 224 dcs era e Hae o To Disarm The System N Illuminated Entry ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE O To Unlock The Doors O To Lock The Doors D Remote Open Window Feature 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie E open The DUNK S os ese KORE ROM eee yee 24 WE Trunk Lock And Release 34 Sie Lhe Panic Alarni aso qve PRED ED de 24 NF uk Safety Waming 253 isch EE XC ne ee cii 35 O Progra
308. onditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button Depending on the vehicle options either the amp radio or the mirror will contain the two control buttons amp Uconnect Phone button and amp VR Voice Command button that will en able you to access the system Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t N VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the U
309. one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect Phone The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which cellular N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe
310. onform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloa
311. only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obt
312. onomy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 AAR EER X MR WE decens mW ET x Ed Mesag SAVE FUEL AME OL OO WE decenas WW k E Gee T ren Average MPG O verace MPG 11 Fuel Saver Mode Off e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous 819793f8 819793f4 Fuel Saver Mode On This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displa
313. ons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poi sonous when inhaled and cause you and others to be severely injured or killed NOTE Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assis tance Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes sage states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink
314. or attempt to open them manually You may Continued 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags may offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down NOTE ward covering both windows on the impact side e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 e Being too close to the SABIC airbags during deploy ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed The system includes side impact sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do
315. or is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 23 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will contin
316. oseness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level and e RKE PANIC button not pressed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING NOTE e If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or then shut down 10 seconds later confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon The park lamps will turn on and remain on during I oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious Remote Start mode injury or death when inhaled e For security power window and power sunroof op Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is away from children Operation of the
317. ount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 CAUTION Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush witha e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly result in engine damage and may decrease corro dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze solution sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Selection of Coolant specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool possible ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi information tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued 392
318. peed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency AutoStick By using the AutoStick mode and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ie RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage WARNING If the driveshaft is removed the vehicle can roll even if the transmission is in PARK which could cause serious injury or death The parking brake must be firmly engaged an
319. peed NOTE e Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd 4th or 5th gear when in the Autostick mode if equipped e Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you e Softly tap the brake pedal N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 e Press the brake pedal or press the clutch pedal to the floor manual transmission e Pull the speed control lever toward you CANCEL Pushing and releasing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping the RESUME ACCEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the lever results in an increa
320. pen containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 If an examination of your engine compartment shows no e Make sure that the radiator and
321. pped add as necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Deal
322. press the vr button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the GVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the vm button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from conf
323. ps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat b
324. ptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available 5 7L Engine with Manual Transmission The 5 7L engine with manual transmis m 4 sion is designed to meet all emissions O1 regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using 800dfab8 high quality premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emission
325. r MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius BEG oos d Ere dos 8 ARE dee PE da 206 D Operating Instructions Radio Mode 206 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play nood was oa EE IE 212 O Notes On Playing MP3 Files 214 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 217 O Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 217 ll Universal Consumer Interface UCI 0 5 li BdilDDEU sir 944 HEERS 4 939 92 oo 218 E Gorn ectine The od suos a de eee eed ES 219 Hone This Feat te 2 023 9 x9 eee fered 220 D Controlling The iPod Using Radio PUNON porrer ese oe ag E GR de AE 220 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 ay Mode EE be VARS PESO SWAES O List Or Browse Mode ll Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES Radios OBS 416445 ee Geo mb ice Heka adia BL System ACHVQUDD o acest e dS Su a O Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID O Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite lU RE ER KERE AK O Satellite Antenna 12392 94 EE RE MES E TISeeeppon QUOD ie scq edd was a Cies O Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode O Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone di Beuipped 24 cuo wsco R pur Edom AS BR ss 228 N Kicker High Performance Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS IC POslbDed 43 e x wd iot s Eee hes ecd n rc d es 228 ll Remote Sound System Cont
326. r fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 298 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla
327. r twice within five seconds Blacafd7 Trunk Release Button With the ignition switch in the ON RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open sym bol will display until the trunk is closed EE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING Trunk Emergency Release WARNINCG Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger e
328. rammable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition is placed in the RUN position the headlights are off and the parking brake is released The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is in the OFF position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is built into the head light switch To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch again or turn off the headlight switch 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 81f3862c Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move t
329. re It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat If the transmission is not operative or if the vehicle is to Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground be towed more than 15 miles 24 km or faster than Flat towing of vehicles is permitted within the following 30 mph 48 km h the vehicle must be transported using limitations a flatbed truck CAUTION With The Key Fob Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front The chittiever must bein NEUTRAL with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front
330. re For The Appointment 445 APrepare His 3 uiros d eed erm aes 445 o Be Reasonable With Requests 445 N If You Need Assistance 445 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 446 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 446 Hn Medco Contactes 2a x Ee xc chee a VO 446 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 447 A Seve CONTACT avo messie neers eee sees 447 Bl Warranty Information 448 E MOPAR Parts o4 ccc0heduuws ed sabe ea de 448 Mi Reporting Safety Defects 448 O In The 50 United States And Washington BENE OM cere ee eee es ee ee O In Canada 444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id W Publication Order Forms 449 E Tracom Grades 45445445 He DER Posee UR 451 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire H Temperaire Grades ge ans oa oh ee ee oS 452 Quality Grades 3 EER AR ed bee ORE E OE 451 O DreadWWeaf 2 ses AO SERE SE EERS N 82 451 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 445 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem P
331. re versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio user s manual for iPod or external USB device support capability e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port located on the center console Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e It may be necessary to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connecting the cable e f the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can
332. regnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tion Remove and store the extender when not needed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81e8d12e Advanced Front Airbag and Knee Bolster Loca
333. repare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the a
334. ressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 202 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard OC Eur nd AA NS cS P4 M p Terin AREI i ETE PERSE PASH DX ME ENT 1 2 ORIGINAL TIRE St COLD TIRI E INFLATION PRES Jona SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maxim
335. ring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and fourth gear Make sure you move the shift lever into second or fifth gear If you let the shift lever move in the direction of the pulling you may end shifting from first to fourth or from sixth to third gear STARTING AND OPERATING 255 CAUTION MANUAL TRANSMISSION m k the vehicl T RECOMMENDED SHIFT S ways make sure the vehicle comes to a complete i stop before shifting into REVERSE Failure to do so od Eie SEP may result in transmission damage You must always use first gear or Reverse when starting inet wating pone Recommended Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in recom l l i mended shift speed chart Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired acceleration rate Farlier ae cruise conditions veces steady speeds may result in increased fuel economy NOTE e Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse inhibitor system When vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h the reverse inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE When at a complete stop you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE 256 STARTING AND OPERATING M with the ignition switch in the ON position RUN position for Keyless Go as compared to the ignition LOCK position OFF position for Keyless Go This is normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibi tor s
336. rity Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Vehicles Equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle or insert a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch if the Start Stop button is removed and rotate it to the ON RUN position Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY The courtesy lights will turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door The lights will fade to off after approximately 30
337. riving M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter _1 Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine _J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas ERROR ETTET 445 O Prepa
338. rols If Equipped see 50 FEM N CD DVD Disc Maintenance 291 ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 292 B Climate Controls 2 005 232 O Manual Air Conditioning And lieste vlei sas atc ien RE DELER aa 292 H Operdung TIpS eo xe puREESISREARS E 237 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlets 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Glove Compartment 4 Radio 040105703 5 Heated Seat Switch 9 Ignition Switch 6 ESP OFF Switch 10 Trunk Release Button 7 Hazard Warning Switch 11 Headlight Switch 8 Climate Control UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM Lj eco Foor Rm 950 ni A 040305874 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position 2 Trip Odometer Button Premium Cluster Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it Base Cluster The word Irip will appear when this button is pressed Push in and hold the button for two seco
339. rrent setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save
340. rt especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering 2 2 STARTING AND OPERATING ee system This noise should be considered normal andit checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are does not in any way damage the steering system apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho WARNING rized dealer Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may Occur WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do Power Steering Fluid Check not overfill
341. rt the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK plosion 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the boo
342. rted device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the SOR BEE EL Bon REDI Go GO Wack N Ek the device manufacturer s guidelines mode Placing items on the iPod or connections to the e LIST button The LIST button will display the top iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob device and or to the connectors to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then follow the same steps SESS STER to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving sub menu levels are available on this system Failure to follow this warning could result in an e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is accident another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting st
343. s Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle 316 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into
344. s ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle may be equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the ON RUN position NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display the ignition switch position OFF ACC RUN Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information OFF 2 ACCESSORY ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into
345. s sa dans ninss 305 Mopar Fans s aw eem EE rerea 376 448 MIBBE BIDE 4 22323 006624 bere tiras 315 Multi Function Control Lever 130 New Vehicle Break In Period 70 Occupant Restraints 2445242020545 cress 36 53 57 Occupant Restraints Sedan 50 53 56 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 314 422 Odometer 444 044 eS5 45d UR RM RES ES 165 170 TOD 4454249 45450546044 hone hoes a ek 165 170 oem Id Od Chance Indicalol 44s a0044 pos EERS ES 172 181 Oil Change Indicator Reset 172 181 Oil Eie uie E DM 378 422 Copa os erectos qup te EC RU bin SEE NUR SOR ees 421 Change Interval dad REREHAD ex s 172 979 CHECKING ss sacs aote dciop deep poe Taie goes dd at 378 Bessie PR P oo ee Oe ee eS a oe 378 Disposal iss Ed RA ood DE tena cet eee 381 I T 381 422 Filter Disposal saa ue mo cene ae Be 381 dertien LOCO sis vex sus ape 29 DEE 379 Materials Added to si BREER BERE HR 381 Recommendation sens 379 421 viuis eres raire hoes m 381 VICO Santee eE R S 380 421 OU Filter Change ace iride Y raae Ra a 381 Oil Filter Selection 5x s n on anaa 381 Onboard Diagnostic System 374 375 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 142 Operating Precautions 4 39 99599 62742455 374 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 82 Overhead Console a amate karen den rogo aes 141 Overheating
346. se EE FEE 14 10 Amp AC Heater Control Red Cluster Security Mod ule If Equipped BE EE d EE SEE SEE 17 20 Amp Cluster Yellow 18 20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet Yellow 19 10 Amp Stop Lights Red FONE N CENE EEN a EEN See e mo EE e Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con Red troller ORC 10 Amp Ignition Run AC Heater Red Control Occupant Re straint Controller ORC 29 5 Amp Cluster Electronic Sta Orange bility Program ESP Powertrain Control Module PCM STOP LIGHT Switch MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse 30 10 Amp Door Modules Power 38 10 Amp Cargo Light Vehicle In Red Mirrors Steering Con Red formation Module If trol Module SCM Equipped CS NM B Jp 10 Amp Heated Mirrors If m EN e e o Red__ Equipped B EE JJ 2 Amp Auto Inside Rearview Orange Mirror Heated Seats If Equipped Switch Bank Front Blower Motor TN mi BE ex des ee o 35 5 Amp Antenna Module If Orange Equipped Power Mir rors 36 25 Amp Hands Free Phone If Natural Equipped Radio Amplifier Feed 37 15 Amp Transmission Blue 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Rear Window Defroster Pink 20 Amp Amplifier Sunroof If Equipped z 2 5 n 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses circ
347. se of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever in SET DECEL If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Accelerate For Passing On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so Press the accelerator as you would normally When the it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Control Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills WARNING NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you The automatic transmission will downshift while climb could lose control and have a collision Do not use ing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads necessary to maintain vehicle set speed that are winding icy
348. sing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI 0 5 IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN RB2 and REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER RBZ REN RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 This feature allows an iPod to be plugged into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod softwa
349. some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued 318 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prev
350. st press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger door When All Doors 1st Press is selected both of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlamps On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlamps Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO A position the headlamps will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To mak
351. st the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF posi tion Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit If desired the front power outlet can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power when the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced U
352. ster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s batt
353. sure the continued proper functioning of the Emission Control System These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 5
354. sures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h poorly The instability could cause a collision AI ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity 300 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which Tire Spinning apply to your spare Fa
355. t idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculation without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor Mix or Defrost mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start t
356. t time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can dam
357. t to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this butto
358. te tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the manual transmission fluid if equipped if using your vehicle for any of the following Most of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C driving in dusty conditions or stop and go driving Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Replace the accessory drive belt 3 5L 5 7L Engines Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary O C C C O L G L L M A I N T E N A N C E S C 3 i J D J T L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service 126 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Rotate tires L Inspect the manual transmission fluid if equipped add as necessary If using your vehicle for any of the _I Inspect the front suspension tie rod e
359. ted are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground 2 If equipped with steel wheels do not remove the wheel cover at this time If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle Jack Warning Label Center Cap Removal 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges and retention teeth 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 1 Tighten 2 Loosen HEE Lug Nut Removal Installation WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly WARNING engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts wheel cover if equipped and tire Remove the cover by hand Do not pry it off 7 Mount the spare tire NOTE For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to 6 install a center cap or whe
360. tempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M guise e f a screwdriver is used make sure a soft material is A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned scratch the paint ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service 2 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps ment bulb when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lamps This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges 4 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place Front Rear Side Marker Lamp 5 Reinstall the front rear side marker 1 Remove the front rear side marker Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard side to disengage the clip EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Tail Turn and Stop Lamp 1 Open the trunk 2 Using a screwdriver remove the tail lamp retainer 4 Pull back the trunk liner 5 Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the
361. th more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pres
362. that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Hav
363. the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking ru structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The
364. the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency KHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase wi
365. the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion FC TIERE Se Paton eee e Note that only the
366. the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued W
367. therwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 2 4 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Manual Transmission If Equipped Automatic Transmission If Equipped The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake parking brake pull the parking brake release handle firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage Parking Brake Release Parking Brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 WARNING WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatall
368. tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Se ee ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pres
369. tions 1 Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbags 2 Knee Bolster NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controll
370. tor Automatic Transmission Only The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 18 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 19 Odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the odometer ECO 2 oes See eon Die eee ee Fuel Saver Indicator GASCAP 2 2 viera ees Loose F
371. tting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen w
372. turned on by this feature 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Steering Column To unlock the steering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering The Electronic Speed Control lever located on the right column in position push the control handle inward until side of the steering wheel operates the system fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serio
373. udios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REO RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch
374. ue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock Brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Low Fuel Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of IC an onboard diagnostic system called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The MIL will turn on when the ignition is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 CAUTION 26 Door Ajar Indicator i i This light will turn on to indicate that one or more Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause door may be ajar damage to the engine control system It also could 27 Decklid Ajar Indicator affect fuel economy and drivability
375. uel Filler Cap Message LONE 2 Fee oboe Gea es eee ors Low Tire Pressure judi Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus ter this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving habits and vehicle usage gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Lo tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer ru display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged
376. uit breakers that are only serviceable by an autho rized dealer The cluster and the driver seat switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11 The passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 12 The door modules the driver power window switch and the passenger power window switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 13 If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578 Visor Vanity Lamps s a 20440 ew SUR etek ee A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 Door CONES aoe ten RT N Out SR ED ee ot 562 Shift Indicator LAMP a es ne ek vi ESE RES JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced
377. um loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed th
378. ur child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH p Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a per
379. ur vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 323 WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it wh
380. ure decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will auto matically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated
381. us injury or death 81bc4c2c ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the speed control system is on To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button again The system and the indicator light will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever downward to SET DECEL and release Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected s
382. use a tire with a smaller load index or that specified for your vehicle Some combinations capacity other than what was originally equipped of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load pension dimensions and performance characteris index could result in tire overloading and failure tics resulting in changes to steering handling and You could lose control and have a collision Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ee SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle
383. uthorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N rYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter
384. vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow the procedure carefully Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further informa tion vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes Using Fob With Integrated Key Tip Start before shifting into any driving gear NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure If Equipped This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the ENGINE START
385. vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags
386. vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position 8 The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 284 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has two available operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs
387. vehicle movement and from the LOCK OFF position with Keyless Go to possible injury or damage the ON position RUN position with Keyless Go The following indicators should be used to ensure that REVERSE you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the SES ree ear OE DEE Ep B way forward and to the left until it stops and is fuly NEUTRAL seated This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the PARK position 260 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage WARNINCG Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear Ihe DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operati
388. where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has
389. xceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ee of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load
390. y injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Continued 276 STARTING AND OPERATING M BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brak
391. yed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func tion gt Reset ALL will display during this three second window Keyless Enter N Go Display If Equipped When the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions the Keyless Enter
392. ystem e Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain you may hear your transmission This can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged clutch pedal released but it may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM Also this may be more noticeable when the transmis sion is warm This is a normal condition and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission 1 4 Skip Shift There are times when you must shift the transmission directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first gear to second gear This is to help you get the best possible fuel economy from your vehicle This occurs when the engine coolant antifreeze is higher than 106 F 41 C vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph 30 km h but less than 21 mph 34 km h and the transmission is in first gear and the accelerator is at 1 4 throttle or less The 1 4 Skip Shift Indicator Message will be displayed during these times When the 1 4 Skip Shift Indicator Message is dis played the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to fourth gear After you shift the transmission to fourth gear you can press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear Downshifting To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life down shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 WARNING AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Skipping more

Owners Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents